Home

Paradyne 9820 User's Manual

Contents

1. If the selectionis Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location System s physical location can be up to 255 characters System Contact Name and how to contact the system person can be up to 255 characters Date Current date in the month day year format mm dd yyyy Time Current time in the hours minutes format hh mm ss NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Enter See Chapter 5 Security and Logins to set up and administer logins 4 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Setting Up for Trap Dial Out Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M An external modem can be attached to the COM port for dialing out when an SNMP trap is generated To set up an external modem you need to 1 2 3 4 Set up SNMP trap managers Set up an external modem Set up Modem Directory phone numbers Configure trap dial out See Configuring SNMP NMS Security to set up SNMP trap managers See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out when trap dial out is desired See Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out for trap and alarm information Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial Out Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M When trap dial out is desired the PC or asynchronous terminal must be disconnected from the uni
2. 0c cece eee 8 5 Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface 8 6 Ml AMIN inh Alana E E E E bechedt Mal bahar aos Meenas 8 7 Troubleshooting Tables 00 cc cece eee EE REREH 8 11 DevicePrebleMS veratro ertrar arr kE h EEEO RENIEN 8 11 Frame Relay PVC Problems cccc20cc0e0anieeeciaweeorenanemend 8 13 E esis Avalable ccccocascacarse dacs isatre mare idatpagaverganianes 8 14 Test Timeout Feature 20 0000 cece een ireas oi 8 14 E Siang and Stopping a lest iscncvstsetepecsideatiernepiadwteeeees 8 15 AbOMING All Tesis taccetccuctonen dasa creda edad wewely wee weed 8 16 S PVC TESS c2ccctctesiateatoiwmieimedody iai ma Rede waeeaewane ad ee 8 17 Network or Port Internal PVC Loopback 02 05 8 18 SEN PANON Ferathcn aninascs diia aa Susuh og dee edges oer onan DDii 8 18 Montor PASI 46 rieira tikarik eirt 7 OER LORRI eRe TO TOR 8 19 CONNCCUIVIY arose treta trita er EE EEEIEE IEEE ATEEN 8 19 a Physical TESS lt ciccictescwiebiaaie Renta dotan ES 8 20 DRE LOOPDACK ciccacmetertadsiasdshdeaonspiatieesreieaae 8 20 E PRNG SU ag teh tae nikipenda Salata a E ea Godin 8 21 AMID ISStsaiiieitoseiedad a eare 8 22 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices m OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 22222000 9 1 m Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System 0 cece eee eee 9 2 Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support 0 0 cece eee eee 9 2 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Co
3. If the CIR is zero the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps 8 18 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitor Pattern Connectivity 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To monitor a pattern test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests gt Monitor Pattern The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Syne message appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 appears in these fields The Connectivity test is only available for multiplexed DLCls Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver device node at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops automatically and can only be executed for multiplexed PVCs Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests gt Connectivity Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver device at the other end of the PVC ARndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver device at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time
4. Value Out of Range n m The value entered is not within the valid limits of n through m inclusive Enter a valid value June 2000 6 15 Monitoring Status Information Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit The following illustration shows the Status menu for the FrameSaver unit Status Menu main status 9820 45M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 5 03 STATUS System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCIs PVC Connection Status Network Interface Status IP Routing Table Model 9820 45M only Performance Statistics Trap Event Log Model 9820 45M only Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit NOTE Status messages contained in the following sections are in alphabetical order 6 16 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 System and Test Status Messages 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring System and test status information is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status The following information is included on this screen Self Test Results Messages Health and Status Messages m Test Status Messages Self Test Results Messages These self test result messages appear in the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Table 6 10 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Failure XXXXXXXX A
5. Not Connected Orn oOo a AJI OJN Modem Connector Model 9820 45M The MODEM connector on the Model 9820 45M modular jack with the following pin assignments Signal Pin Not Connected 1 Ring 2 Tip 3 Not Connected 4 June 2000 uses a 6 position 4 contact 9820 A2 GB20 20 Technical Specifications Table D 1 FrameSaver SLV Unit Technical Specifications 1 of 3 Specification Criteria Approvals Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M EMC Class A Network ICE Safety Approvals Model 9820 45M EMC Class A Network Modem Safety FCC Part 15 ICES 003 CISPR22 VCCI CTR1 CTR2 73 23 EEC 89 336 EEC 91 263 EEC CSA 950 EN 60950 AS 3260 FCC Part 15 ICES 003 FCC Part 68 CS 03 CSA 950 UL 1950 Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 D 1 Technical Specifications D 2 Table D 1 FrameSaver SLV Unit Technical Specifications 2 of 3 Specification Criteria Weight Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Weight Model 9820 45M 2 6 Ibs 1 2 kg 19 0 Ibs 8 4 kg Physical Dimension Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Height Width Depth Physical Dimensions Model 9820 45M
6. 10 8 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Editing Alarms gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens Property Editor Custom Domain _ RT Delay _ Proxy SNMP Properties File GrenadaS8 Type FrameRelay Logging Domain Stat Host Conv ART DLCI Add Edit Delete Trap Variable Rising Falling DLCI USRDEF 3FrSent elta 45000 45000 3i Add ISRDEF FrSent SRDEF FrSent Edits ISRDEF FrSent SRDEF FrSent Delete ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF 3FrSent ISRDEF 3FrSent 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Edit button to the right of the list The Edit Trap window opens 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 10 9 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Domain Stats Type Trap Yariable Key1 Threshold Severity Soript Description Community Trap Number j Edit Trap USRDEF Ethernet Stats Drop Events io B00 Absolute Delta Rising _ Falling _ Both 45000 i E SLV Frames Snt Rising Th
7. Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Service Level Verification Options General System Options Network Data Port Physical Interface Options User Data Port Physical Interface Options Interface Frame Relay Options DLCI Record Options PVC Connection Options Table 4 10 Node IP Options Table 4 11 Management PVC Options Table 4 12 General SNMP Management Options Table 4 13 Telnet and FTP Session Options Table 4 14 SNMP NMS Security Options Table 4 15 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options Table 4 16 Ethernet Port Options Model 9820 45M Table 4 17 Communication Port Options Table 4 18 External Modem COM Port Options Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Table 4 19 Modem Port Options Model 9820 45M Configuring the Overall System The System menu includes the following 9820 A2 GB20 20 Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification General June 2000 4 13 Configuration Options Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system see Table 4 2 Main Menu gt Configuration gt System Frame Relay and LMI See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface to set an interface s frame relay options Table 4 2 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 2 LMI Behavior Possibl
8. The frame relay link on one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled Invalid Some portion of the PVC connection is not fully configured 1 For the circuit to be active both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active 6 24 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Network Interface Status Network Interface Status can be selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status Network Interface Status Network Interface Status Screen Example main status network 9820 45M Device Name Node A 05 13 2000 5 06 NETWORK 1 INTERFACE STATUS Operating Rate Kbps 44120 ESC for previous menu MainMenu Refresh Table 6 15 Network Interface Status Field Value What It Indicates Operating Rate Kbps 0 52000 The clock rate detected on the network interface Disconnected The line is disconnected 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 25 Monitoring IP Routing Table Model 9820 45M The IP Routing Table display is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status IP Routing Table IP Routing Table Screen Example main status connections 9820 45M Device Name Node A Destination 05 13 2000 5 07 Page 1 of 2 IP ROUTING TABLE Gateway Hop Interface 001 001 001 002 001 220 001 221 001 220 001 222 001 001 001 001 001 001 Refresh 000 111 000 000 010 000 010 011 012 026 001 026 001 042 001 042 001 042 0
9. A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls 1Port Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 No management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port 1 user data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls NetOnly Auto configuration of a network DLCI only no Port 1 or PVC connections are configured No Port 1 PVC connection or management DLCI is configured Disable No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration takes place The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 4 7 Configuration Options 4 8 NOTE If 1MPort the default is not the setting required for your application change the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecting the network cable or editing discovered option settings Otherwise the FrameSaver unit will start discovering DLCls as soon as it powers up To recover from this problem edit a selected discovered DLCI or PVC connection manually if any DLCls or PVC Connections have been configured manually If only a local management PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit has been configured select the desired Frame Relay Discovery Mode and Save the change The default discovery mode is 1MPort management DLCls multiplexed with data DLCls on Port 1 which creates two embedded DLCls EDLCls one EDLCI for Port 1 user data and another EDLC
10. Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events 4 46 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 15 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 3 of 5 Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of the interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events only Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events only Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap messages These traps are not supported on the COM Terminal port Network Generates these trap messages on the network interface only Ports Generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the user data port only All Gen
11. Provide summary and detail information that identifies DLCls with the highest incidence of errors high bandwidth utilization and trends These reports identify those DLCls that have exceeded a specified number of accumulated exception points It is a good idea to run this report daily so that DLCls having the most problems can be attended to first DLCls contained on this report need immediate attention If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports check whether any new equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly configured If its configuration is correct the equipment could be faulty Summary Reports Provide summary information for the network volume and error leaders and DLCI traffic Network Summary Report Provides an overall view of the network Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into problems Leaders Summary Report Identifies DLCls having the highest volume and errors High traffic volume may be increasing latency and the high Health Index rating indicates problems It is a good idea to run these reports daily so a norm can be established The same DLCls should appear Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems Problems to look for include a normally high volume DLCI is dropped from the list a new DLCI appears on the list check Element Summaries a DLCI has a high Health Index rating but low volume significant differences between
12. RXD control lead IN 8 June 2000 S Sampling SLV Inband and Interval 4 16 saving configuration options screen area function keys area how to navigate scrolling through valid selections security 1 3 P 1 2 2 3 5 5 1 SNMP NMS options 4 44 selecting a field from a menu Self Test enable disable 4 18 results messages 6 17 Send test pattern 8 18 serial number NAM 6 2 Service A service level management reports 11 6 verification configuring 4 16 statistics 6 30 verifier SLV service provider management control connectivity Session Access Level 4 42 B 5 ending starting Set DE setting Date amp Time system clock 4 4 date and time setting up auto configuration external modem local management 4 10 service provider connectivity 4 11 SNMP trap managers 4 44 so router can receive RIP SLA SLIP SLM OpenLane 5 7 9820 A2 GB20 20 SLV service level verifier configuring 4 16 Delivery Ratio 4 16 DLCI Down on Timeout Packet Size performance statistics reports Sample Interval secs 4 16 Synchronization Role 4 17 Timeout Error Event Threshold 4 16 4 17 SNMP assigning soos BESTT i levels limiting access Management fees NMS security options 4 Number of Managers setting up Trap Managers ead Traps downloading standards supported software changing download
13. Subnet Mask Alternate Destination DLCI EDLCI Link Alternate Frame Relay Link Annex A and D LMI Protocol ARP inverse assigning community names and access levels AT commands 9820 A2 GB20 20 At a Glance report authentificationFailure trap aa e Active setting up Auto rating availability LMI and PVC B back door access when locked out Back to Back Mode Active 6 18 operation setting up 4 12 Backspace Bo 4 27 Be 4 26 blank field value branches menus bursting port C Call Directories Call Retry central clock changing configuration options domains and groups 10 6 operating mode 4 12 software release Character Length 4 52 matching CIR statistics 6 30 Clearing Event LMI 4 15 4 24 existing information clearing statistics 6 29 Clock Invert Transmit out of range setting system Source Transmit June 2000 IN 1 Index COM port as default IP destination 4 34 configuration options 4 52 connector set up for trap dial out Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Committed Information Rate CIR 4 27 Communication Port configuration options Community Name 4 40 assigning Concord Network Health compatibility 11 1 Configuration Auto Active displaying and changing options menu menu branch 2 4 option areas option tables 4 13 saving options tables upload download configuring
14. selecting from structure messages Device 6 11 Health and Status Self Test Results system System and Test Status Test Status DBM MIB access downloading support minimal remote configuration Mode changing Operating demos 4 12 Test 6 4 6 6 16 8 model number modem Health and Status messages setting up trap dial out Modem port as default IP destination 4 34 controlling access user interface options modifying a login 5 12 Monitor DTR RTS test pattern IN 6 Monitor CTS Monitor DSR monitoring DLCI history data 10 16 FrameSaver unit LEDs and control leads using NetScout Manager Plus 10 19 monitoring the unit Multiplexed DLCI 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 38 4 39 DLCI Type 4 26 PVCs 8 19 N N1 LMI Status Enquiry 4 15 4 24 N2 LMI Error Event 4 15 4 24 N3 LMI Clearing Event Name 4 36 1 or 2 Access Access 4 40 Community 4 40 navigating the screens Net Link Port Use 4 52 4 59 NetOnly NetScout Manager Plus NMS support NMS support Network Com Link Down 6 19 data port LED 6 5 data port connector data rate 4 19 data rates supported DLCI records options 4 26 Health Concord reports 11 1 interface status latency physical options 4 19 PVC Loopback 8 18 reference time Network Health installation and setup 11 2 NMS IP Address 4 44 4 45 5 10 IP Validation Op
15. A From DCE 4 A 16 B 11 B Request to Send RTS 105 4 A To DCE 3 A 19 B 10 B Signal Ground Common SG 102 7 8 Data Channel Received Line 109 8 A From DCE 5 A Signal Detector RLSD or LSD 10 B 12 B Transmit Signal Element 113 24 A To DCE 7 A Terminal Timing TT 11 B 14 B DTE Source Received Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE 13 A RXC DCE Source 4 B 3 B 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 C 7 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments X 21 DTE Adapter Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M This adapter is used to connect the user data port to a DTE with an X 21 cable It is a 25 pin EIA 530A to 15 pin X 21 DB25 to X 21 adapter cable This cable Part No 035 0302 0131 is part of the X 21 Cable Kit Feature No 9008 F 1 521 98 15883 The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25 to X 21 adapter cable 25 Pin 15 Pin Plug Socket Signal ITU Pin Direction Pin Transmit Data TXD 103 2 A To DCE 2 A 14 B 9 B Received Data RXD 104 3 A From DCE 4 A 16 B 11 B Received Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE 6 A RXC DCE Source 9 B 13 B Request to Send RTS 105 4 A To DCE 3 A 19 B 10 B Data Channel Received Line 109 8 A From DCE 5 A Signal Detector RLSD or LSD 10 B 12 B Transmit Signal Element 113 24 A To DCE 7 A Terminal Timing TT 11 B 14 B DTE Source
16. A valid network data port rate cannot be detected because the Unit is trying to detect a valid port rate Rate detected is greater than the highest port rate supported by the unit FrameSaver SLV 9820 rates 56 64 or 128 kbps in 56 or 64 kbps increments FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M rates 64 2048 kbps in 64 kbps increments FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M rates 1024 8192 kbps in 8 kbps increments FrameSaver SLV 9820 45M rates 1024 44210 kbps in 8 kbps increments CTS down to Port 1 Device Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M The user data port CTS control lead on the FrameSaver unit is off DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link 1 2 The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead from the device connected to the user data port is deasserted 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Table 6 11 Health and Status Messages 2 of 2 Message What It Indicates Ethernet Link Down Model 9820 45M The Ethernet port is administratively enabled but communication is not possible Fan Failure Model 9820 45M At least one fan has failed Link Down Admini
17. Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC On the Model 9820 45M this address may be shared only among management PVCs On Models 9820 9820 2M and 9820 8M this address may also be used to access the COM port 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 4 33 Configuration Options Table 4 10 Node IP Options 2 of 3 Default IP Destination Possible Settings Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M None COM PVCname Possible Settings Model 9820 45M None Modem Ethernet COM
18. FTP access SNMP access through IP addresses 5 10 Telnet access Link Destination 4 30 frame relay statistics Protocol Source 4 29 Traps 4 47 Traps Interfaces troubleshooting management TS Management 4 35 linkUp and linkDown events 4 47 traps B 8 9820 A2 GB20 20 Index LMI and PVC availability Behavior Clearing Event N3 4 15 4 24 configuring frame relay and 4 14 Down 6 19 8 9 Error Event N2 4 15 4 24 frame relay statistics Heartbeat T1 4 15 4 25 Inbound Heartbeat T2 4 15 4 25 N4 Measurement Period T3 4 15 4 25 packet utility 8 5 Parameters 4 24 pass through 4 14 Protocol Status Enquiry N1 4 15 4 24 uploading packet capture data local external DTE loopback 4 22 setting up management 4 10 locked out 5 11 8 4 logging in logging out Login creating 5 11 ID 5 11 modifying and deleting 5 12 Required 4 41 53 59 5 3 5 5 5 6 security information Loopback DTE Port DTE Initiated PVC LOS at Network 6 19 8 10 LED June 2000 IN 5 Index M MAC address Main Menu screen branch 2 4 making input selections Management and Communication options 4 32 General SNMP options OpenLane 5 0 PVCs total number dedicated setting up local 4 10 SNMP troubleshooting link menu branches Configuration main 2 4 path
19. Replace the power cord Move the power module switch to the On position 8 Verify that the power module LED is lit and that the front panel System PWR LED is off June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Menu Hierarchy Menus The following is a graphical representation of the FrameSaver SLV unit s menu organization 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 Menu Hierarchy Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status System and Test Status Test LMI Reported DLCls Configuration Network LMI Reported DLCls DLC Status CIR bps System and Test Status Self Test Results Health and Status Test Status Last System Reset Source Link DLCI EDLC e Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status PVC Connection Status Network Interface Status IP Routing Table Performance Statistics Trap Event Log Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Identity System and NAM System Name Contact and Location Serial Number e Current and Alternate Software Revisions Hardware Revision Ethernet MAC Address Performance Statistics Service Level Verification e DLCI Frame Relay Ethernet e Clear All Statistics Trap Event Log Time Elapsed Since Event Event Network Interface Status e Operating Rate I
20. a DLCs average and peak Health Index rating June 2000 11 7 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Elements Summary Report Compares DLCI traffic with volume and the baseline bandwidth utilization and errors Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison to identify DLCls with above or below average volume so they can be investigated when there are any significant changes Supplemental Report Shows DLCI availability and latency The information shown in this report is also on other Health reports However these charts show more than ten DLCls at a time so you have a broader view of the service provided by the network Service Level Reports Provide summary information for a group list for a longer reporting period than other reports Executive Service Level Report Provides service level performance for an enterprise on a single page Use this report to assess whether IT service levels are meeting availability and service goals IT Manager Service Level Report Provides service level information for various groups Using this report you can compare service level performance of various groups The report summarizes service levels for a group of DLCls along with details on individual DLCls within that group Customer Service Level Report Provides service level information for customers This report is used to provide service level information to service customers t
21. configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup To use this feature the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Using this feature you can transfer configuration files to from a FrameSaver node program files to a FrameSaver node and User History data froma FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a management PVC or through the COM Terminal port Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands However you can retrieve the data file for the user history reports regardless of access level You cannot put a configuration file to the factory cfg or current cfg files under the system directory Configuration files should be put to a customer file cust1 cfg or cust2 cfg then loaded into the downloaded unit s Current Configuration via the menu driven user interface m You can only put a NAM program file nam ocd into a FrameSaver unit You cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host Before putting a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in binary transfer mode m When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS you can only get a uhbcfull dat file It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get this information see Transferring Collected Data A data file uhbcfull dat or Imitrace syc canno
22. m Verify and correct domains and groups Monitor the agent and DLCls Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus refer to the m NetScout Manager Plus User Guide to help you install the application monitor traffic and diagnose emerging problems on network segments NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you configure agents remote servers and report templates using the various NetScout products NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between the FrameSaver unit and its router and configure the probe on network segments you want to monitor June 2000 10 3 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network B gt Procedure A 2 Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar on the left side of the window File v Agent w AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the Name and IP Address headings If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus installation the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are configured yet Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar to the far right of the screen Applicable configuration an
23. so only the following two events need to be generated eventIndex eventDescription eventType eventCommunity 1 Default SLV Rising Event log and trap 4 0 2 Default SLV Falling Event log and trap 4 0 The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit shows the alarm and event types the interval used when generating alarms and thresholds Physical Interface Alarm Defaults m Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLC Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLC Alarm Defaults See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps for information about how traps work and Traps RMON Specific for traps specific to remote monitoring Rising Event Operation If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table e g frames dropped by the network the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the end of the interval Only one alarm per event per interval is generated The alarm condition persists until the event has been disarmed reset The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising threshold has not been crossed during an interval allowing the event to return to its original disarmed state 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 B 15 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Network Synchronous Port Physical Interface Alarm Defaults These alarms only apply to the FrameSaver unit s network data port interfac
24. up for Level 1 access or you may be inadvertently locked out NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes When Save is complete the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 5 11 Security and Logins See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about security configuration options Modifying a Login Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one Deleting a Login B gt Procedure To delete a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu gt Control gt Administer Logins 2 Page through login pages records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys until the login to be deleted is displayed 3 Select Delete 4 Save your deletion When the deletion is complete the number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record before the deleted record reappears Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 5 12 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring This chapter includes the following m Displaying System Information Front Panel LEDs Front Panel Status LEDs Displaying LEDs and Control Leads Display LEDS and Control Leads Screen Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen Model 9820 45M Power Modu
25. 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Rx Non octet Aligns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRx STONE NonOctet OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx CRC Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr emis OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total LMI Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 15 mins in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained B 18 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area Table B 12 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 1 of 2 These alarms apply to all DLCls on the network interface and can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the Paradyne alarm area Item Sample Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Event Type Rising Threshold Default Falling Threshold Default DLCI Inactive Seconds D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactive Secs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D 900 secs 15 mins Rising 1 1 Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D 900 secs 15 mins Rising Rx FE
26. 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 2 1 D N Burst Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 3 1 D N Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 4 1 D N Burst Frames 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 2 1 LMI Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Total Tx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Total Rx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 2 1 N Port Burst Upper Limits 1 4 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 3 1 N Rx Port Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 4 1 N Tx Port Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets 1 Interface ID
27. 20 Security and Logins Controlling Telnet or FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or FTP session Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on a service provider s troubleshooting TS management link Limiting Telnet Access Telnet access can be limited by Disabling Telnet access completely Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Management Link m Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions Disabling TS Management Link access To limit Telnet access via a service provider s troubleshooting management link see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link B gt Procedure To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet access Telnet Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Assign an access level Session Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the Telnet session e g if a user has a Level 1
28. 4 power on self test enable disable PPP Primary Destination DLCI EDLCI Link Primary Frame Relay Link Primary Link RIP printed reports 11 7 problem indicators product related documents Proprietary RIP 4 38 4 56 Protocol address resolution Link LMI Point to Point PPP 4 55 Routing Information RIP 4 38 4 56 Serial Line IP SLIP 4 55 Simple Network Management SNMP PVC availability connection status connections 4 29 total number Management 4 36 total number dedicated name 4 34 4 35 4 46 Network Loopback tests 8 17 troubleshooting problems 8 13 June 2000 IN 7 Index Q quality of service Quick Reference R ratios FDR and DDR RD control lead rear panel remote units minimal configuration reports Network Health 11 7 resetting statistics the unit 8 3 unit default configuration options restoring communication with a misconfigured unit retrieving statistics Return Enter key revision software and hardware RFC 1213 and 1573 RFC 1315 RFC 1604 RFC 1659 RFC 1757 RFC 2021 right arrow key RIP 1 4 4 11 4 56 RLSD control lead RMON alarm and event defaults B 15 Specific Traps Traps 4 47 user history collection router setting up to receive RIP 4 11 router independence 1 4 4 14 Routing Information Protocol RIP 4 56 RTS control lead running reports 11 6
29. 4 17 Communication Port Options B gt Procedure To download software 1 2 3 7 4 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd system to change to the system directory Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the nam ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then nam ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful The file is loaded into system memory nam ocd File Transfer Failed The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit Invalid file A different Rxxxxxx ocd file will need to be downloaded Repeat the step or end the FTP session NOTE During the download a series of hash marks appear When the hash marks stop appearing there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the nam ocd File Transfer Complete message appears Please be patient Do not exit from FTP at this time See Changing Software to activate the newly downloaded software June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 FTP Operation Determining Whether a Download Is Completed To see whether a download has completed check the Identity screen Main Menu gt Status gt Identity Check Alternate Software Rev under the NAM Identity column m f a software revis
30. 9 4 1 1 57 1 D Network Frames Dropped Above CIR Within EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop CirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 59 1 D Network Frames Offered Above EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciOfferedFrOverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 61 1 D Network Frames Dropped Above EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop OverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 63 1 D DLCI EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D Maximum Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyMax 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 8 1 D Latency Packet Size MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyPacketSz 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size B 26 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 4 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795
31. 9820 45M rates 1024 144210 kbps in 8 kbps increments If the message continues to appear Check that the DCE is connected to the network data port and that the cable is securely attached at both ends Confirm that there is a valid clock on the cable Manually configure the NTU for a rate supported by the FrameSaver unit f necessary replace the FrameSaver unit with a higher speed FrameSaver unit capable of supporting the NTU clock rate CTS down to Port 1 Device Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M The CTS control lead on the device s interface is off Check DTR and RTS from Port 1 Verify that the port is enabled Check DTR from the user data port DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link 1 2 The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network service provider 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network data port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port June 2000 8 7 Troubleshooting 8 8 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 2 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead on the device connected to Port n is off Examine the attached DTE and cable connected to the Frame
32. 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 27 Monitoring Performance Statistics Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a selected interface Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the severity and frequency or duration of a condition Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Physical and link layer statistics Layers 1 and 2 are collected on the port The following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected Performance Statistics Menu main status performance 9820 45M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 5 08 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay Ethernet Clear All Statistics Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit 6 28 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Clearing Performance Statistics Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a directly connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is Level 1 This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature True statistic counts are always maintained so SLAs can be verified and they can be viewed from an SNMP NMS However since statistics can be cleared locally the statistics viewed via the menu driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the NMS gt Procedure To clear all statistics Performance Statistics
33. A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system Firmware downloading provides an easy to use tool for downloading to an entire network or a portion of the network On demand polling of FrameSaver devices and SNMP polling and reporting are available June 2000 1 5 About FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitors 1 6 NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probe Support Provides complete LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monitoring functions for FrameSaver SLV devices The following features are supported using this application Thresholds for RMON 1 Remote Monitoring Version 1 alarms and events can be configured Models 9820 and 9820 2M Performance monitoring can be performed using collected RMON 2 Version 2 data NetScout Manager Plus s Protocol Directory and Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver SLV 9820 and 9820 2M units to measure up to eleven network layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated by each Its IP Top Talkers and Listeners reporting identifies the devices using network bandwidth for traffic and protocol analysis identifying the network s top six users In addition it collects performance statistics from FrameSaver devices Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15 minute buckets with 96 buckets in a 24 hour period for up to five days worth of data Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver devices at sites where full 7 layer monitoring an unlim
34. Dial in connection using the internal modem Model 9820 45M m Direct terminal connection over the COM port Terminal port on the Model 9820 45M When logging on the User Interface Idle screen appears m f no security was set up or security was disabled the Main Menu screen see Main Menu on page 2 4 appears You can begin your session m f security was set up and is enabled you are prompted for a login Enter your login ID and password When the user interface has been idle a session is automatically ended and the screen goes blank when the unit times out Press Enter to reactivate the interface B gt Procedure To log in when security is being enforced 1 Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter 2 Type your Password and press Enter Valid characters All printable ASCII characters Number of characters Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Case sensitive Yes An asterisk appears in the password field for each character entered June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 User Interface and Basic Operation If your login was Then the Valid Main Menu appears Begin your session Invalid Message Invalid Password appears on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed After three unsuccessful attempts A Telnet session is closed The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly connected terminal An external mo
35. EDLCI 4 30 4 31 Link June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Device messages 6 11 troubleshooting problems 8 11 Dial In Access external modem 4 57 Modem port 4 59 Dial Out Delay Time Min 4 48 Directory 4 49 options Trap 4 48 Directory Alternate Dial Out disabling SNMP access Discard Eligible DE 4 37 Disconnect Time COM port 4 54 Modem port 4 60 Telnet session inactivity discovering elements DLCls 11 3 Discovery frame relay FR Frame Relay Mode saving a mode change displaying configuration options identity information LEDs and control leads DLCI 4 38 4 39 Destination Down 6 18 8 7 on SLV Timeout interface status 6 22 monitoring user history 10 16 Number 4 26 Priority 4 28 Records 4 26 Source 4 29 statistics status 6 21 Traps on Interfaces Type 4 26 domains and groups correcting 10 6 verifying 10 5 download capability 9820 A2 GB20 20 Index downloading determining when completed MIBs and SNMP traps SLV alarms software user history file 10 13 DSR control lead 6 7 6 9 DTE Loopback 8 20 port initiated loopbacks DTLB DTR control lead down from Port 1 Device Ignore Control Leads 4 53 E Easy Install configuration options EDLCI 4 38 4 39 Destination 4 30 4 31 Source 4 29 EIA 232 crossover cable EIA 530 A co
36. Indicates Link Identifies the cross connection of DLCls configured for the unit Net1 FR1 Source destination is frame relay link 1 on Network 1 the network data port Port 1 User data port Port 1 Mgmt PVC Name a Virtual circuit is a management link that terminates in the unit where Name is the link name 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 23 Monitoring Table 6 14 PVC Connection Status 2 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates DLCI 16 to 1007 For standard DLCls Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI EDLCI 0 to 62 For multiplexed DLCls only Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI Status Identifies whether the physical interfaces LMls and DLCls are all enabled and active for this PVC connection Active 1 The PVC is currently active Inactive The PVC is inactive because Alarm conditions and network and SLV communication status indicate that data cannot be successfully passed The unit has disabled the interface or frame relay link due to internal operating conventions Activation of an alternate virtual circuit is not warranted that is no alarm condition on the primary destination link has been detected Disabled The PVC cannot be activated and is essentially disabled as a result of how the unit was configured Possible causes The physical interface at one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled
37. Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Access level is n Configuration is Read only The user s access level is 2 or 3 the user is not authorized to change configurations No action needed Already Active The test selected is already running Allow test to continue Select another test Stop the test Cannot Modify TS Management Link The Management PVC you are attempting to modify is defined as the TS Management Link No action needed Modify a different PVC Cannot save no Level 1 Login IDs You are attempting to save a configuration which has no Level 1 Login ID Create a Login ID with an access level of 1 then save the configuration Command Complete Configuration has been saved or all tests have been aborted No action needed Connection Refused Two menu driven user interface sessions are already in use when a Telnet session was attempted Wait and try again DLCI in connection Delete connection first You tried to delete a DLCI that was part of a connection No action needed or Delete the connection then delete the DLCI DLCI Number Already Exists The number entered is a duplicate of an existing DLCI record Enter another DLCI number DLCI Number Reserved The number entered is a special excluded DLCI in the product Enter another DLCI number File Transfer Complete See
38. Monitor RLSD Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the Received Line Signal Detector RLSD circuit on the network data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the unit When this condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M If Port Type is set to X 21 the Indication interchange circuit is monitored instead of RLSD Enable Interchange circuit CF ITU CCITT 109 RLSD is monitored to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DCE Disable RLSD is not monitored RLSD is assumed to be asserted and data is transmitted regardless of the actual state of the lead June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring the User Data Port Select Physical to display or change the physical characteristics of the user data port connected to the DTE see Table 4 6 Main Menu gt Configuration Data Ports Physical The data rate of the user data port is automatically set to the rate of the network interface Table 4 6 User Data Port Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Port Type Possible Settings E530 V 35 X 21 Default Setting V 35 Selects the type of port to be used for the user data port Display Conditio
39. Out 8 Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view see Step 7 of this procedure Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Object ID Cross References Numeric Order in Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Default to identify OID information being shown 10 18 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Models 9820 and 9820 2M Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls NOTE Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar are supported for FrameSaver SLV agents The procedure below describes how to monitor an agent s traffic The procedure is the same for protocol monitoring but you may be prompted to select a Domain Group as well as an agent or DLCI gt Procedure 1 Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 If you want to monitor one of the agent s DLCls highlight the DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on an applicable icon The selected g
40. PVCname Default Setting None Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route Examples f the default IP network is connected to the communications port select COM f the default IP network is connected to a far end device over the management PVC named London for the remote device located in the London office select the PVC name London as defined by the Name configuration option Table 4 11 Management PVC Options NOTE Ifthe link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the unrouteable data will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down change the default destination CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS router LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops which will last 16 iterations times the retry count None No default network destination is specified Unrouteable data will be discarded This is the recommended setting Modem Specifies that the default destination is connected to the Modem port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 19 Modem Port Options Ethernet Specifies that the default destination is connected to the Ethernet port see Table 4 16 Ethernet Port O
41. Ping Test Lamp Test Problem Indicators The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems Indicators See LEDs Displaying LEDs and Control Leads and Front Panel LEDs in Chapter 6 Monitoring as well as the user interface screen Main Menu gt Status gt Display LEDs and Control LEDs Health and Status Health and Status Messages in Chapter 6 Monitoring Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Performance statistics Performance Statistics in Chapter 6 Monitoring to help you determine how long a problem has existed Alarm conditions that will Alarms on page 8 7 generate an SNMP trap SNMP traps Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps supported include warm start authentication failure enterprise specific those specific to the unit link up and link down 8 2 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication You can reset the unit in one of four ways Reset it from the Control menu Cycle the power Reset the configuration options for the COM Terminal port or reload the factory default settings Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS see your NMS documentation The unit performs a self test when it is reset Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to i
42. Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR DDR between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled To use this capability both ends of all PVCs must be FrameSaver SLV devices If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s they must be running software version 1 2 or higher Enable An extra byte for FDR DDR statistics collection is included with each frame which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the network Disable Extra byte is not included DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a DLCI is declared Inactive after the configured threshold for SLV Timeout has been exceeded NOTE This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCls connected to a far end unit with hardware bypass capability Enable After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded the DLCl s status is changed to Inactive Disable An SLV Timeout Error Event does not affect DLCI status SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 3 Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be detected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared 1 20 Sets the limit for these error events June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Option
43. Settings Node IP Address Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node IP Address Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC providing connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network Node IP Address Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address see Table 4 10 Node IP Options Special 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to display edit an IP address for the unit s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the node s IP address June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 11 Management PVC Options 2 of 4 Intf Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node Subnet Mask Calculate Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is providing connectivity to an external IP network through frame relay that requires a specific subnet mask for the interface Node Subnet Mask Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 4 10 Node IP Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit disp
44. Signal Ground Common SG 102 7 8 C 8 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments V 35 Network Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M This cable is used to connect the network data port to an NTU with a V 35 interface It is a 25 position EIA 530A to 34 pin V 35 DB25 to V 35 cable This cable Part No 035 0383 1031 is part of the V 35 Cable Kit Feature No 9008 F 1 522 99 16302 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 C 9 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments C 10 The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25 to V 35 network cable 25 Pin 34 Pin Socket Plug Signal ITU Pin Direction Pin Transmit Data TXD 103 2 A To DCE P A 14 B S B Received Data RXD 104 3 A From DCE R A 16 B T B Transmit Signal Element Timing 114 15 A From DCE Y A TXC DCE Source 12 B AA B Received Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE V A RXC DCE Source 9 B X B Transmit Signal Element 113 24 A To DCE U A Terminal Timing TT 11 B W B DTE Source Request to Send RTS 105 4 To DCE Clear to Send CTS 106 5 From DCE D Data Terminal or DTE Ready 108 1 2 20 To DCE H DTR Data Channel Received Line 109 8 From DCE F Signal Detector RLSD or LSD Loopback Maintenance RL 140 21 To DCE N Local Loopback LL 141 18 To DCE L Test Mode Indicator TM 142 25 From DCE NN Data Set or DCE Ready DSR 10
45. Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 1 Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Write Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 2 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 2 Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNM
46. XTXC ON Oa FWD Chassis Ground TXD RXD RTS DSR Signal Ground CD RLSD OMAN DOA FF WD oO DTR XTXC 99 16332 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 B gt Procedure Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments To configure an external modem 1 Disconnect the asynchronous terminal from the standard cable See page C 4 for an illustration of the COM Port connection 2 Reconnect the crossover cable to the external modem 3 Enable auto answer on your modem and configure it to use the following LSD DSR CTS RTS and DTR control leads See the table below for AT DO command strings Use the following command string AT amp C0 amp D2 amp S0 amp R1 DO SO 1 AT Command String To configure the modem to amp CO Force LSD on amp D2 Drop the connection when the unit drops DTR amp SO Force DSR on amp R1 Ignore RTS DO Force CTS on S0 1 Automatically answer incoming calls June 2000 C 5 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments User and Network Data Port Connectors Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M The following table provides the pin assignments for the EIA 530 A connector to the DTE or NTU C 6 Circuit 25 Pin Signal Mnemonic ITU Direction Pin Shield 1 Transmit Data TXD BA 103 To DCE 2 A 14 B Received Data RXD BB
47. a get command from the unit you can only transfer files to the unit not from it See Upgrading System Software in Chapter 7 FTP Operation Please Wait Command takes longer Wait until message clears than 5 seconds Resetting Device Please Wait Yes or y was entered in the Reset COM Port usage field of the System Paused menu No action needed June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Table 6 9 Device Messages 5 of 5 Monitoring Message What It Indicates What To Do Test Active No higher priority health and status messages exist and a test is running Contact service provider if test initiated by the network Wait until the test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from User Interface Already in Use Two Telnet sessions are already in use when an attempt to access the menu driven user interface through the COM Terminal port is made IP addresses and logins of the users currently accessing the interface are also provided Wait and try again Contact one of the IP address user and request that they log off User Interface Idle Previously active session is now closed ended and access via the COM Terminal port is now available Log on to the FrameSaver unit Session has been ended due to timeout No action needed
48. added SLV units elements 11 4 DLCI records manually frame relay options NetScout Manager Plus System options 4 13 the system Connectivity setting up service provider 4 11 connectivity 8 19 Control keys 2 6 lead descriptions 6 6 6 8 menu branch Control Leads displaying status Ignore 4 53 controlling async terminal access external device access FTP access SNMP access Telnet access conversation elements 11 3 copyrights A CRC 6 36 IN 2 creating a login 5 11 new PVC connections management links user history files 10 13 crossover cable EIA 232 CTS control lead down alarm down Health and Status message current software revision D Data Delivery Ratio DDR 1 3 Link Control Identifier DLCI Port physical options 4 21 Rate Kbps 4 52 rate network interface rate user data port rates supported selection criteria uploading SLV and packet capture Data Port network interface options Date amp Time setting DB25 COM Port connector DB25 to DB25 crossover cable straight through cable DB25 to V 35 DTE adapter network cable C 10 V 35 network cable DB25 to X 21 adapter cable network cable DBM Health and Status messages test status messages DDR DE Set Default Gateway Address for Ethernet port Default IP Destination 4 34 Delete key deleting a login 5 12 Destination 4 46 Default IP DLCI
49. default values IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the Ethernet port 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the Ethernet port which you can view or edit The first three digits may not be 127 Clear Clears the IP address for the Ethernet port and fills the address with zeros Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the Ethernet port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the Ethernet port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 16 Ethernet Port Options 2 of 2 Default Gateway Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies an address for packets sent out the Ethernet port that do not have a route 00
50. discovery process is completed and required changes are made the newly discovered elements DLCls should be organized into a group for Health reporting Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node types e g all SLV elements Once grouped you can then run reports on all DLCls in the network as well as reports on individual DLCls B gt Procedure To group elements 1 From the console select Edit Groups from the Reports menu The Add Groups dialog box opens Enter a name in the Group Name field Up to 64 characters can be entered A through Z a through z 0 through 9 dashes periods and underscores _ can be used No spaces can be included and the word All cannot be used Select the WAN radio button above the Available Elements list Highlight all the DLCls listed on the Available Elements list or select specific DLCls then select the left arrow button The highlighted DLCls move from the Available Elements list to the Group Members list Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the Group Members list The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on the Groups dialog box See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That chapter also tells you how to customize reports June 2000 11 5 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Generating Reports for a Group Once Net
51. ee 7 2 revision NAM 6 2 Source DLCI EDLCI Link Spacebar specifications technical speed network interface user data port 4 21 Standard_out RIP standards compliance for SNMP Traps starting a session a test statistics ps ca uploading to an NMS 9820 A2 GB20 20 Index Status DLCI Enquiry LMI 4 15 4 24 Health and information 6 16 LED menu branch PVC connection 6 23 6 24 6 25 test messages 6 20 Stop Bits 4 53 stopping a test 8 15 Subnet Mask for COM port 4 55 for Ethernet port 4 50 for Modem port 4 61 interface 4 37 Node suggestions user documentation A summary network report 11 7 switching between screen areas to new software System and test status messages configuring options 4 13 displaying information Frame Relay and LMI options 4 14 General options 4 18 messages Name Contact and Location setting the clock data amp time T T1 LMI Heartbeat 4 15 4 25 T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat 4 15 4 25 T3 LMI N4 Measurement Period 4 15 4 25 Tab key Te 4 27 TCP TD control lead technical specifications Telnet limiting access Session user interface options Terminal Port Use 4 52 4 59 June 2000 IN 9 Index Terminal port as default IP destination 4 34 configuration options 4 52 connector Port Use 4 52 Test menu branch Mo
52. enabled m Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network Device reset capability HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web interface June 2000 9 1 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Instructions for installing Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM System can be found in the following documents OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions See Product Related Documents in About This Guide for document numbers Select the appropriate document In addition to installation instructions these documents include instructions for m Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services Accessing the OpenLane application m Adding a FrameSaver device Adding a Customer ID The OpenLane SLM System has an extensive Help system For additional information refer to the following sources For UNIX users Refer to the readme txt file for distributed infrastructure details and the online Help for operational details For Windows NT users Refer to the online Help Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support 9 2 With the OpenLane SLM system s extensive online Help system the application is self documenting and you have access to the most current system information B g
53. far end device is not successful Avg RdTrip Latency Average round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size bytes Table 4 3 Service Level Verification Options over the previous 15 minute period If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average is not available until a new sample has been received Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful Max RdTrip Latency Same as average Avg RdTrip Latency but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 minute interval Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 31 Monitoring The statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the connection If the far end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit frame relay latency Frame Relay Delivery Ratio FDR and Data Delivery Ratio DDR performance statistics are collected If the far end device is a non FrameSaver device or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620 only frame relay statistics are collected DLCI Performance Statistics 6 32 These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance S
54. forct protocols Tag protocolDistStatsOctets 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask B 24 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 2 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Non octet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 4 H T N IP Top Listeners 1 6 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devRmonIPTopNDstIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 6 H T N IP Top Talkers 1 6 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devRmonIPTopNSrclIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 3 1 D DLCI CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciFrCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 7 1 D Tx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciTxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 8 1 D Tx BECNs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrCircuitTxBECN 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 1 D Rx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciRxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Ne
55. frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number June 2000 4 29 Configuration Options Table 4 9 PVC Connection Options 2 of 3 Primary Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the primary destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLC or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if the network data port has no DLCls defined this interface would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the network data port as the destination link Primary Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number Primary Destination EDLCI Possible Se
56. is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column June 2000 8 19 Troubleshooting Physical Tests Physical Tests can be commanded for the user data port CAUTION You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test equipment DTE Loopback The DTE external Loopback DTLB test loops the received signal on a user data port back to the DTE Use this test for isolating problems on the user data port An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back User Data DTLB pens Port Of ph 99 16284 CAUTION DTE Loopback will affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned to the user data port Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted To start and stop a DTE Loopback follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test Data Port Physical Tests View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 8 20 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver device router or NMS to which it has a route Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver device in the network to verify that t
57. login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about setting Telnet configuration options 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 5 5 Security and Logins Limiting FTP Access 5 6 FTP access can be limited by Disabling FTP access completely Requiring a user ID and password to login m Limiting FTP bandwidth Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M B gt Procedure To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable FTP FTP Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login If you want to allow users to configure the unit or perform file transfers including downloads keep the access at Level 1 Level 1 access is required to download software to the unit or to upload or download configuration files Level 3 is sufficient for NMS access for SLV historical information Li
58. on the following interfaces Network and synchronous data ports Physical sublayer interfaces Frame relay logical link layer interfaces Table B 5 linkUp and linkDown Traps Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause linkDown A failure in one of the A failure in one of the communication interfaces communication interfaces has has occurred occurred linkUp One of the failed One of the failed communication communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational up and operational linkUp and linkDown variable bindings are in Table B 6 Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB B 8 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 1 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer Network Synchronous Data Port Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB User Synchronous Data Port Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port If the interface is configured to monito
59. pin assignments for the connectors interfaces and cables NOTE In the pin assignment tables of this appendix if the pin number is not shown it is not being used 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 C 1 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Rear Panels The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver 9820 9820 2M and 9820 8M models sys 0990000009000 999909900000 0000000000000 6 CO 5 000000000000 000000000000 POWER com PORT NETWORK 98 16189 The following illustration shows the rear panel of the FrameSaver 9820 45M ope Pemiemcr ememme remem ermener 0000000000 OBOSOBOBOBOESOESOBOBOP0P 0PM 0P 090 0 0 Oe0s0 3005050502050 OQOQOL OLOS OSOLOLOS0S ns Ie Terminal Port Q a Modem FLO OL Hod 4SN ol ALG OL og YOMION 00 16783 C 2 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 COM Terminal Port Connector Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the DB25 communication port connector The communication port is called the Terminal port on the Model 9820 45M Signal Direction Pin Shield 1 Transmit Data TXD To COM port In 2 Received Data RXD From COM port Out 3 Request to Send RTS To COM port In 4 Carrier Detect CD From CO
60. relay link Inactive Network problems 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 35 Monitoring Table 6 19 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 3 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay HDLC Errors Rx Total Errors The number of receiver errors on the interface The following are included in this count Receive invalid frames short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors Rx Total Discards m Receive errors non octet aligned frames frames with CRC errors and Rx Overruns Rx Total Discards The number of receiver discards on the interface The following are included in this count Resource errors Rx Overruns Frames received when the link was down a Inactive and disconnected DLCls Inactive destination DLCls m Unknown EDLCls Rx Overruns The number of receiver overruns too many bits on the interface Rx Non Octet Frames The number of non octet frames received on the interface Rx CRC Errors The number of received CRC cycle redundancy check errors Tx Total Errors The total number of transmit errors on the interface including transmits discards and transmit overruns Tx Total Discards The total number of transmit discards on the interface including underrun flushes Tx Underruns The number of transmitter underruns too few bits on the interface 6 36 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Ethernet Performan
61. screen 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 7 5 FTP Operation Transferring Collected Data 7 6 SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP which is faster than other methods For Models 9820 9820 2M and 9820 8M the rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP Max Receive Rate Kbps option see Table 4 13 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options For Model 9820 45M the rate is fixed NOTE Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet data the data files are not in user readable format LMI packet capture data can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log see Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for additional information B gt Procedure To retrieve data 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data will be retrieved Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd data to change to the data directory If retrieving Then SLV statistics Perform a get of the uhbcfull dat file File Transfer Complete Transfer was successful File Transfer Failed Transfer was not successful Try again or end the session LMI pack
62. selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator m With FECN Set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion notifications The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 33 Frame Relay Performance Statistics The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Frame Relay All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 222 2 then the count starts over The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear when multiple frame relay links have been configured Table 6 19 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 1 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Link Frames Sent The number of frames sent over the interface Frames Received The number of frames received over the interface Characters Sent The number of data octets bytes sent over the interface Characters Received The number of data octets bytes received over the interface FECNs Received The number of forward explicit congestion notifica
63. statistics gathering user interface cannot be accessed COM port set up external modem for trap dial out communication port options Ethernet port options external modem on Com port options Modem port options 4 59 resetting restoring access Telnet session user defined history 10 13 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Index V W V 35 cable kit C 9 C 11 warmStart Value Out of Range message 4 26 4 27 events General Traps variable bindings B 9 B 14 trap B 7 vcl 1 5 warranty A viewing packet capture results Web site virtual path or channel identifier access to documentation VPI 1 5 glossary X X 21 cable kit C 7 C 8 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 IN 11
64. steps needed once you have access to the applications See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup information and a full discussion of the application s features and how to use them 11 2 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Discovering FrameSaver Elements Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications the Discover dialog box opens Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and discover their DLCls Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the Poller Configuration which are used to poll the units IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be entered for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and discover their elements These elements are resources that can be polled e g LAN WAN interfaces frame relay circuits routers and servers The two types of elements that can be polled are Statistics elements Provide counters and other gauges for information gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis Conversation elements Provide RMON2 and similar data for information gathered about network traffic between nodes gt Procedure To find SLV device elements in your network 1 Select the LAN WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type 2 Enter the IP Addr
65. than 8192 octets in length The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to DLCls outside the valid range that is a number less than 16 or greater than 1007 The device on the far end of the circuit may have been configured incorrectly or the DLCls configured for the FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCls supplied by the service provider Unknown DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to unknown DLCls The DLCI may not have been configured or it has been configured to be Inactive Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly Unknown Error The number of frames received over the interface that do not fall into one of the other statistic categories Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize Frame Relay LMI LMI Protocol The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link Normal condition Status Msg Received The number of LMI status messages received over the interface Normal condition Total LMI Errors The number of LMI errors Reliability errors protocol errors unknown report types unknown information elements and sequence errors are included in this total Network problems Number of Inactives The number of times the LMI has declared the frame
66. the alternate directory s telephone number is called see the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M Enable Attempts to retry the call up to one time per SNMP trap message with a delay between the retry The delay is specified by the Dial Out Delay Time Min configuration option Disable Does not retry an incomplete call Dial Out Delay Time Min Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 5 Specifies the amount of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent the wait between call attempts see Call Reiry Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M 1 10 Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts inclusive 4 48 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 15 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 5 of 5 Alternate Dial Out Directory Possible Settings None 1 5 Default Setting None Specifies whether an incomplete call busy or no answer etc resulting from an attempt to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number Up to 5 alternate call directories can be set up but only one at a time can be used When Call Retry is enabled the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed after one additional try then the specified alternate directory s
67. the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access will be permitted for the port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing CAUTION Before changing the communication port s access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level 1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable D
68. the COM Terminal port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM Terminal port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM Terminal port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M for which the Link Protocol is PPP PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol June 2000 4 55 Configuration Options 4 56 Table 4 17 Communication Port Options 5 of 5 RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option only appears w
69. the DTE Disable DTR is not monitored DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Monitor RTS Conirol Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send RTS circuits on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the RTS off condition is detected CTS is deasserted LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M Enable Interchange circuit CA ITU 105 RTS is monitored to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE Disable RTS is not monitored RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the port s attached data terminal equipment using the port s interchange lead LL ITU 141 for Models 9802 9820 2M and 9820 8M or LA ITU 143 for Model 9820 45M Display Conditions This option does not appear when Port Type is set to X 21 Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback Disable The DTE cannot control the local external DT
70. 0 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the Default Gateway Address which you can view or edit The first three digits may not be 127 Clear Clears the Default Gateway Address to 000 000 000 000 Packets without routes are discarded 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 4 51 Configuration Options Configuring the Communication Port 4 52 Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to display or change the COM port Terminal port on the Model 9820 45M configuration options see Table 4 17 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port Table 4 17 Communication Port Options 1 of 5 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM Terminal port NOTE Ifthe Default IP Destination is set to COM see Table 4 10 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The COM Terminal port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The COM Terminal port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device port NOTE Ifthe COM port configured for Net Link is used to connect to an external modem there is a potential security risk of an unauthorized user gaining access to the NMS or other devices on the LAN for which this device has routing table entries Data Rate Kbps Possible S
71. 0 20 Configuration Options Table 4 7 Interface Frame Relay Options 3 of 3 LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 June 2000 4 25 Configuration Options Manually Configuring DLCI Records The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their PVC Co
72. 0 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Sent D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitSentFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be 0 Exceeding CIR Tag devFrExtDiciTxFrOutCIR 1 min configured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 B 21 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 13 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1LD Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Tx CIR Utilization D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained Table B 14 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item T
73. 0 F 1 920 DB25 plug to 8 position modular receptacle COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable 035 0315 1431 3100 F2 910 14 ft 4 3 m 50 position to 50 position 0 5 inch straight 035 0399 1031 9008 F 1 514 exit connector HSSI cable 10 ft 3 m X 21 Cable Kit which includes a 9008 F 1 521 X 21 Network Cable 10 ft 3 m 035 0384 1031 X 21 DTE Adapter Cable 035 0302 0131 EIA 530 A to X 21 1 ft 3 m V 35 Cable Kit which includes a 9008 F 1 522 V 35 Network Cable 10 ft 3 m 035 0383 1031 V 35 DTE Adapter EIA 530 A to V 35 002 0095 0031 EIA 530 Straight Through Cable 035 0385 1031 9008 F 1 523 DB25 to DB25 10 ft 3 m 50 position 0 5 inch straight exit connector 035 0375 0031 9580 F 1 570 Ethernet 10BaseT cable with 8 pin modular connectors 14 ft 4 3 m 035 0349 1431 Power Cable 6 ft 1 8 m North America 125 0057 0031 June 2000 E 3 Equipment List E 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Index Numbers 55 hexadecimal test pattern A aborting tests Access Dial In 4 57 Name 4 40 Type 4 44 Access Level 5 10 5 11 assigning COM port 4 54 Modem port 4 60 security Session 4 42 adding SLV units to network 11 3 Alarm Fail 6 4 6 6 6 8 adding manually 10 11 conditions editing 10 9 LED is lit RMON defaults using template 710 8 ALM LED 6 4 6 6 6 8 Alternate Dial Out Directory 4 49 IP Address 4 58 software revision
74. 01 026 001 026 001 026 001 026 001 PVCMgmt 1001 PVCMgmt 1002 Ethernet Modem COM Modem PVCMgmt 1003 PVCMgmt 1004 PVCMgmt 1005 PVCMgmt 1006 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 ESC for previous menu MainMenu Table 6 16 IP Routing Table 1 of 2 Field What It Indicates Destination The IP address of the route Mask The subnet mask of the route Gateway The network gateway IP address for the route Hop The number of hops to the destination for the route Type The method that was used to add the route RIP The route was discovered through RIP Loc The route was added as part of the unit s configuration NMS The route was added by an NMS using SNMP Tmp The route was added as a temporary route to answer an IP packet that was received The route is deleted when its TTL expires or when the unit is reset Hyphen The source of the route is not maintained in the table 6 26 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Table 6 16 IP Routing Table 2 of 2 Field What It Indicates Interface The interface used to get to the destination COM The COM Terminal port is used Modem The Modem port is used Ethernet The Ethernet port is used PVCname The specified management PVC is used Internal An internal route is used for loopbacks or internal functions TTL Time To Live in seconds TTL can have a value 1 999
75. 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 5 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about these configuration options 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 5 7 Security and Logins Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1 which provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access Disabling SNMP access Assigning SNMP community names and the access type Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit Disabling SNMP Access 5 8 When the SNMP access is disabled the FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages B gt Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Disable the SNMP Management option 3 Save your change See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Security and Logins Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an SNMP manager SNMP manager
76. 104 From DCE 3 A 16 B Request to Send RTS CA 105 To DCE 4 A 19 B Clear to Send CTS CB 106 From DCE 5 A 13 B Data Set or DCE Ready CC 107 From DCE 6 DSR Signal Ground Common SG AB 102A To From 7 DCE Received Line Signal Detector CF 109 From DCE 8 A RLSD or LSD 10 B Transmit Signal Element DA 113 To DCE 11 B Timing TXC DTE Source 24 A Transmit Signal Element DB 114 From DCE 12 B Timing TXC DCE Source 15 A Received Signal Element DD 115 From DCE 17 A Timing RXC DCE Source 9 B Local Loopback LL LL 141 To DCE 18 Data Terminal or DTE CD 108 1 2 To DCE 20 Ready DTR Test Mode Indicator TM TM 142 From DCE 25 NOTE The user data port has a DCE personality while the network data port has a DTE personality June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments X 21 Network Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M This cable is used to connect the network data port to an NTU with an X 21 interface It is a 25 position EIA 530A to 15 pin X 21 DB25 to X 21 cable This cable Part No 035 0384 1031 is part of the X 21 Cable Kit Feature No 9008 F 1 521 99 16303 The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25 to X 21 network cable 25 Pin 15 Pin Socket Plug Signal ITU Pin Direction Pin Transmit Data TXD 103 2 A To DCE 2 A 14 B 9 B Received Data RXD 104 3
77. 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 See Table B 15 for an RMON history OID cross reference and Table B 16 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 B 23 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 1 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 1 Link Speed MIB MIB Il RFC 1573 Tag ifSpeed 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 All DLCI LMI Rx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 1 All DLCI LMI Tx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Rx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 2 P Protocol Octets MIB RMON II RFC 2021 for 11 y
78. 2 9 inches 7 4 cm 8 5 inches 21 6 cm 12 5 inches 31 8 cm Height 7 inches 18 cm Width 17 2 inches 44 cm Depth 13 inches 33 cm Power Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Input 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 7A Output 12 Vdc 2 5A 1 0A minimum Power Model 9820 45M Input 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption and Dissipation Models 9820 and 9820 2M Power Consumption and Dissipation Model 9820 8M Power Consumption and Dissipation Model 9820 45M 4 8 watts 100mA at 100 Vac Result 16 38 Btu per hour 5 0 watts 90 mA at 120 Vac Result 17 06 Btu per hour 5 6 watts 60 mA at 240 Vac Result 19 11 Btu per hour 9 7 watts 186mA at 100 Vac Result 33 10 Btu per hour 9 9 watts 164mA at 120 Vac Result 33 78 Btu per hour 10 8 watts 110mA at 240 Vac Result 36 85 Btu per hour 74 1 Watts 1 06 A at 120 Vac Result 252 8 Btu per hour June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Technical Specifications Table D 1 FrameSaver SLV Unit Technical Specifications 3 of 3 Specification Criteria COM Port 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Data rates DB25 connector 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps Terminal Port 9820 45M Data rates DB25 connector 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 kops LAN Port Specifications Data rates 8 pin modular socket Receive Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802 3 Transmit Ethernet Version 2 10 or 100 Mbps Networ
79. 301 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 5 Select History List from the View menu The History List window opens The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list History List 6 Highlight the desired set of user history variables and select the OK button Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables This may take some time so please be patient 7 Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu if desired 3D Bar is shown NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File Yiew Format 0 11 02 16 11 07 16 11 12 17 11 17 17 11 22 17 11 27 17 Wed Oct 21 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 O 1 10 32 2 1 8 10 301 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 5 10 301 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 oO 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 10 301 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 10 17 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected you can click on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File Yiew Format 11 26 17 11 27 17 11 28 17 11 29 16 11 30 16 Wed Oct 21 4 10 301 7 10 301 Click to Zoom
80. 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSeqErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Tx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Rx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Nonoctet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Tx Total Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Rx Total Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Rx Overruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Tx Underruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 B 29 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 30 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit rear panels and
81. 7 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Inbound Dropped Characters Above CIR Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR Total number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 4 3 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear NA appears instead of a statistical count if FDR DDR Frame Delivery Ratio Data Delivery Ratio information is not being received from the far end device The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were within within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Unknown appears if communication with the
82. 7 6 From DCE Signal Ground Common SG 102 7 23 B June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments V 35 DTE Adapter Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 9820 A2 GB20 20 This adapter is used to connect the user data port to a DTE with an V 35 cable It is a 25 pin EIA 530A to 34 position V 35 DB25 to V 35 adapter This adapter Part No 002 0095 0031 is part of the V 35 Cable Kit Feature No 9008 F 1 522 99 16294 June 2000 C 11 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25 to V 35 adapter 25 Pin 34 Pin Plug Socket Signal ITU Pin Direction Pin Shield 1 A Transmit Data TXD 103 2 A To DCE P A 14 B S B Received Data RXD 104 3 A From DCE R A 16 B T B Transmit Signal Element Timing 114 15 A From DCE Y A TXC DCE Source 12 B AA B Received Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE V A RXC DCE Source 9 B X B Request to Send RTS 105 4 To DCE C Clear to Send CTS 106 5 From DCE D Data Terminal or DTE Ready 108 1 2 20 To DCE H DTR Data Channel Received Line 109 8 From DCE F Signal Detector RLSD or LSD Data Set or DCE Ready DSR 107 6 From DCE E Signal Ground Common SG 102 7 B Loopback Maintenance RL 140 21 To DCE N Local Loopback LL 141 18 To DCE L Signal Ground Common SG 102 23 B Transmit S
83. 9820 8M C 9 V 35 DTE Adapter Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M C 11 EIA 530 A Straight through Cable Models 9820 9820 2M QS20FEM ranra arden hoes E E ae cen ER Memeeeas C 13 m EIA 612 613 HSSI Connectors Model 9820 45M C 15 m LAN Connector Model 9820 45M 00 000 cece eee eee C 16 Modem Connector Model 9820 45M 0 cece eee eee C 16 D Technical Specifications E Equipment List E EGUPDMEN si ccdeitensocndsh ci onde eced Jaded pede EO Subee sed E 1 E ATETEA nat awe et ae ete ata ae EN E E 3 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 vii Contents Viii June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience This document contains information needed to properly set up configure and verify operation of FrameSaver SLV in line monitors It is intended for system designers engineers administrators and operators Document Organization Section Description Chapter 1 About FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitors dentifies how FrameSaver SLV in line monitors fit into Paradyne s SLM solution and describes the features of these units Chapter 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Shows how to navigate the user interface Chapter 3 Configuration Procedures Shows how to access and save configuration options Chapter 4 Configuration Options Describes the configuration options available on the units Chapter 5 Security and Logins Shows how to control access to t
84. 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 13 Telnet and FTP Session Options 3 of 3 FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP file transfer protocol client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session This option must be enabled when downloading files Enable Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client Disable Does not allow FTP sessions FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Management Link Enable User is prompted for a login ID and password Disable No login is required for an FTP session FTP Max Receive Rate kbps For FrameSaver SLV 9820 Possible Settings 1 128 Default Setting 128 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M Possible Settings 1 2048 Default Setting 2048 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M Possible Settings 1 8192 Default Setting 8192 Sets the maximum receive rate of file transfer to the system This option allows new software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation Using this option new software and configuration fil
85. At a Glance Report Using the FrameSaver SLV report on page 11 9 you can compare a DLCs volume with the network s performance over a specified period of time Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled In addition all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer s utilization on network efficiency 11 6 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 About Trend Reports Printed Reports Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices By specifying specific variables like bandwidth trend analysis can be performed and shown on Trend Reports Up to ten variables for a DLCI or ten DLCls on one variable can be generated on a single trend report Information can be presented in a line graph pie chart bar chart or table format Any amount of time can be specified for the reporting period These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health Index rating See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index ratings All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices 9820 A2 GB20 20 The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver SLV units Exception Reports
86. CNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D 60 secs 1 min Rising Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D 60 secs 1 min Rising Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciSts CongestedSecs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D 60 secs 1 min Rising Frames Dropped by Network MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D 60 secs 1 min Rising 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 12 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 2 of 2 Tag devFrExtLatencyMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Maximum Latency D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 1 1 1 min in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained B 20 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults T
87. Clear All Statistics B gt Procedure To clear specific sets of statistics m Use the ClrSLV amp DLClIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of the following screens Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics gt DLC m Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance statistics Performance Statistics gt Frame Relay m Use the ClrStats function key to reset the Ethernet performance statistics Performance Statistics Ethernet 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 29 Monitoring Service Level Verification Performance Statistics These statistics appear when Service Level Verification SLV is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Service Level Verification They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCls are multiplexed Table 6 17 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Far End Circuit Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI VCI Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier at the other end of the connection If the far end circuit is a DLCI the DLCI number 16 1007 appears If a VPI VCI the number is displayed as xx yyy xx being the VPI number 0 15 and yyy being the VCI number 32 2047 None appears if the unit has not communicated with the ot
88. E 9820 and A 9820 2M virtual interface ifIndex 65 2 513 OUT VIRTUAL PVC i interface number For the DCE DLCI number DCE DTE calculated value 1 June 2000 B 5 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps This section describes the FrameSaver unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing ifString have the following format DLCI diciNumber circuitld of ifName frame relay link linkName dlciNumber is the DLCI number DLCI dilciNumber only appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap circuitld is the name given to the circuit It can be an empty string or a 1 64 byte string within quotes e g Chicago to New York and only appears when a DLCI with circuitID is associated with the trap linkName is the name given to the link Frame relay linkName only appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with the trap ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable Example DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port SO1P1 frame relay In this example a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap The unit supports the following traps warmStart authenticationFailure linkUp
89. E Loopback 4 22 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface 9820 A2 GB20 20 Select Frame Relay from the interface s menu to display or change the Frame Relay options for an individual interface see Table 4 7 Main Menu gt Configuration Network Data Ports Frame Relay See Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System for additional information Table 4 7 Interface Frame Relay Options 1 of 3 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Initialize_From_Net1FR1 Initialize_From_Interface Auto_On_LMI_Fail Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting For user data port links Initialize_From_Interface For network data port links Auto_On_LMI_Fail Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery source for the LMI protocol Initialize_From_Net1FR1 The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame relay link Net1FR1 LMI Protocol is set to None internally but once a protocol has become active or is set on the primary Network link the protocol will be set to the same value on this link Standard Annex A or Annex D The protocol will not be updated based on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially Display Conditions This option value only appears for a user data port Initialize_From_Interface The LMI type
90. FrameSaver SLV MODELS 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M and 9820 45M USER S GUIDE Document No 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 KANADAN S Copyright 2000 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair install
91. I for management data that is for each DLCI discovered on the network a multiplexed network DLCI and a standard data port DLCI will be configured and connected and a Management PVC will be embedded in the network DLCI When LMI is active on the network interface and PVC status information with provisioned DLCI numbers is next received from the network the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration area Configuration options set by the selected discovery mode can be manually modified refined or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus No previously discovered and configured DLCls or cross connections will be removed unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled see Automatically Removing a Circuit Additional discovered DLCls will be configured according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting Selecting or changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks NOTE When auto configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI but a standard DLCI is needed change the DLCI to standard from the network DLC Records screen Configuration Network gt DLCI Records June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and saved the Saving will cause Auto Configuration to update and Restart Are you sure prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes y is entered the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt ap
92. ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards T5 mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Tx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards ele mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Rx Total Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs He ning OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Tx Total Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 15 mins Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 11 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Tag devFrExtLinkTotal LMIErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Rx Overruns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns 13mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Tx Underruns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 15 mins Tag devFrExtLinkTx Underruns OID 1 3 6
93. M port Out 5 6 8 Signal Ground SG To From COM port 7 Data Terminal Ready DTR To COM port In 20 LAN Adapter Converter and Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M The following shows the pin assignments for the DB25 plug to modular jack converter between the COM Terminal port and the 8 conductor LAN Adapter cable Feature No 3100 F 1 920 Custom 8 conductor cable with modular plugs on both ends between the converter and the LAN Adapter Feature No 3100 F2 910 lack Converter Cable Com Port 8 Position Plug to Plug to DB25 Plug Modular Jack Modular Jack LAN Adapter Tx Clock 1 1 Unused Rx Data 2 2 DTR Signal Ground 3 3 Tx Data Tx Data 4 lt 4 Signal Ground DTR 5 lt 5 Rx Data CD 6 6 CTS RTS 7 j lt 7 Frame Ground Rx Clock 8 8 Unused 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 98 16214 C 3 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Standard EIA 232 Crossover Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M C 4 A standard EIA 232 crossover cable can be used to connect the COM port to an external modem This is an ElIA 232 plug to EIA 232 plug DB25 to DB25 cable The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with the FrameSaver unit See page C 5 to configure an external modem Pin 1 tte A Pin 13 y Pin 25 Pin 25 Pin 13 Pin 1 Pin 14 Chassis Ground TXD RXD RTS DSR Signal Ground CD RLSD RXC DTR
94. MI options or to set specific LMI options for this interface System Use system LMI options see Table 4 2 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Custom Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated 4 24 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB2
95. MP Get command to the MIB objects This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Get and Set commands to the MIB objects However access for all read only objects is specified as read only 4 44 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out 9820 A2 GB20 20 Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to configure SNMP traps and dial out when a trap is generated see Table 4 15 Dial out is not available on the Model 9820 45M Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for trap format standards and special trap features including RMON specific traps and the default settings that will generate RMON specific SNMP traps Table 4 15 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 1 of 5 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the FrameSaver unit An NMS IP Address must be configur
96. Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Getting Started Before configuring NetScout Manager Plus you need to copy some OpenLane directories to a NetScout Manager Plus user directory OpenLane provides these directories as a starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files A template of alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available OpenLane paradyne directories include the following Properties paradyne fsd file found in O penLane netscout alarms directory Properties paradyne fst file found in OQpenLane netscout alarms directory Alarms slvtemplate fct file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory User history pd udh files found in O penLane net scout userHistory directory These files should be moved to NSHOME usr So they can be used See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template and Creating History Files for additional information 10 2 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 9820 A2 GB20 20 For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear make sure your environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file You need to Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory m Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager In addition for Models 9820 and 9820 2M you need to Configure agent properties
97. P Routing Table Destination Mask Gateway e Hop Type Interface TTL MAIN MENU Status Configuration PVC Tests PVC Tests DLCI Number PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity Data Port Physical Tests DTE Loopback Network Auto Configuration Data Port Control Physical Tests Easy nstall Data Port aa Other IP Ping IP Address Status IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests MAIN MENU Status Load Test Configuration lt Configuration Edit Display from Auto Configuration Network and Data Ports Physical Frame Relay e DLCI Records System Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification e General 9820 45M 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M A 2 System Network Data Ports PVC Connections Management and Communication Control Easy Install PVC Connection Management and Table Communication Options Source Link DLCI Node IP ie Apacs Management PVCs pore Link General SNMP Management Alternate Destination Link z Teinetand RIR Seeon DLCI EDLCI gt SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps Ethernet Port Communication Port External Modem New or Modify Management PVC Entry New or Modify PVC Connection Entry Modem Port 00 16786a June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatic Circuit Re
98. P managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands 4 40 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 9820 A2 GB20 20 Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP File Transport Protocol session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security applicable to the session Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time see Table 4 13 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Session When a TS Management Link has been set up and activated the following options have no effect upon the PVC m Telnet Login Required m Session Access Level FTP Login Required Table 4 13 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 3 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client Disable Does not allow Telnet sessions Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and passw
99. Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 June 2000 4 15 Configuration Options Configuring Service Level Verification Options 4 16 SLV options are selected from the System menu see Table 4 3 Main Menu gt Configuration gt System Service Level Verification Table 4 3 Service Level Verification Options 1 of 2 SLV Sample Interval secs Possible Settings 10 3600 Default Setting 60 Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV devices Inband communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency as well as transmission success and other SLV information 10 3600 Sets the SLV Sample Interval secs in seconds SLV Delivery Ratio Possible
100. S when IP address validation is performed The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to communicate with the unit Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management SNMP Management Enable See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about SNMP management configuration options B gt Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses Select the SNMP NMS Security options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt 1 SNMP NMS Security 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate 3 5 10 To Set the configuration option Enable IP address checking NMS IP Validation to Enable Specify the number between 1 and 10 of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit Number of Managers to the desired number Specify the IP address es that identifies the SNMP manager s authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit NMS n IP Address to the appropriate IP address Specify the access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validates is performed Access Level to Read or R
101. Saver unit s port Check that the Port 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the attached equipment Fan Failure 9820 45M One of the fans has failed Notify your service representative Have the fan assembly replaced as soon as possible See Replacing the Front Panel Assembly in Chapter 12 Hardware Maintenance 9820 45M June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 3 of 4 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do LMI Down The Local Management For the network data port frame relay link Interface is down for the specified frame relay link LMI was never up verify Verify that Frame Relay If all of the above have been verified and the physical link is not in Alarm contact your network provider that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used If LMI was never up Verify that the proper time slots have been configured Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used Performance Statistics show LMI frames being transmitted For user data port Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being received Check the attached de
102. To DCE 18 Loopback Maintenance RL 140 21 To DCE 21 Transmit Signal Element 113 24 A To DCE 24 A Terminal Timing TT 11 B 11 B DTE Source Test Mode Indicator TM 142 25 From DCE 25 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments EIA 612 613 HSSI Connectors Model 9820 45M The 50 pin HSSI connectors on the Model 9820 45M use standard EIA 612 613 9820 A2 GB20 20 signaling Pin Pin Positive Negative Signal ITU Side Side Direction Signal Ground SG 102 1 26 Receive Timing RT 115 2 27 From DCE DCE Available CA 107 3 28 From DCE Receive Data RD 104 4 29 From DCE Send Timing ST 114 6 31 From DCE Signal Ground SG 102 7 32 DTE Available TA 108 2 8 33 To DCE Terminal Timing TT 113 9 34 To DCE Loopback Circuit A LA 143 10 35 To DCE Send Data SD 103 11 36 To DCE Signal Ground SG 102 13 38 Signal Ground SG 102 19 44 Test Mode TM 142 24 49 From DCE Signal Ground SG 102 25 50 June 2000 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments LAN Connector Model 9820 45M The LAN connector on the Model 9820 45M uses a standard IEEE 802 3 8 pin modular jack Signal Pin Direction Transmit Data TD Out Transmit Data TD Out Receive Data RD Not Connected Not Connected Receive Data RD Not Connected
103. URATION Frame Relay Discovery Mode 1MPort Automatic Circuit Removal Enable Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Save 4 6 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode Configuration Options When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active the FrameSaver unit discovers network DLCls from the network LMI status response message It configures a network DLCI a user data port DLCI and automatically connects them to create a PVC Main Menu gt Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically configured network DLCls are multiplexed and each automatically configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding network DLCI These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link between your equipment and the network NOTE A local Management PVC e g the PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit s user data port must be configured manually it cannot be configured automatically see Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected Discovery Mode Configuration Description 1MPort default Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 A management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded DLCls EDLCIls is configured for Port 1 user data and management data
104. V 9820 45M 0 44210000 If blank the switch does not support this feature 1 Appears for 10 seconds only before the network changes Deleted to Inactive and New to Active 6 22 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 PVC Connection Status Monitoring PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status PVC Connection Status Only PVC connections with Source DLCls configured to be Active are shown PVC Connection Status Screen Example main status connections Device Name Node A Link PVC CONNECTION STATUS Source Primary Destination DLCI EDLCI Link DLCI EDLCI Status 9820 45M 05 13 2000 5 05 Page 1 of 2 Alternate Destination LINK DLCI EDLCI Status Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 201 Net1 FR1 202 Net1 FR1 100 Net1 FR1 204 Net1 FR1 Mgmt PVC Dunedin Net1 FR1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Refresh 206 Net1 FR1 207 Net1 FR1 208 Net1 FR1 209 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 PgDn 300 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 500 502 Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Inactive Active Inactive Active Inactive ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Ifthe No PVC Connections message appears instead of a list of PVC connections no PVC connections have been configured yet The Alternate Destination columns appear only for the Model 9820 45M Table 6 14 PVC Connection Status 1 of 2 Field Status What It
105. V In Line Monitors FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitor Features 9820 A2 GB20 20 The FrameSaver SLV in line monitor provides the following features Intelligent Service Level Verification Provides accurate throughput latency and availability measurements to determine network performance and whether service level agreements SLAs are being met along with SLA reporting SLA parameter thresholds can be configured to provide proactive notification of a developing network problem Security Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access to the unit TruePut Technology Using Frame Delivery Ratios FDR and Data Delivery Ratios DDR throughput within and above CIR as well as between CIR and EIR and above EIR can be measured precisely eliminating inaccuracies due to averaging These ratios are available through OpenLane SLV reports Frame Relay Aware Management Supports diagnostic and network management features over the frame relay network using the Annex A Annex D and Standard UNI User Network Interface LMI management protocol The unit s frame relay capability also supports Inband management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Unique nondisruptive diagnostics CIR monitoring on a PVC basis Multiple PVCs on an interface Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single network P
106. VC Auto Configuration Provides the following automatic configuration features Frame Relay Discovery For automatic discovery of network DLCls and configuration of a user data port DLCI the PVC connection and a management PVC which is multiplexed with user data DLCls LMI Protocol Discovery For automatic configuration of the protocol being used by the network DLCI Deletion For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCls from the unit s configuration and statistical databases CIR Determination For automatic recalculation of the committed rate measurement interval Tc and excess burst size Be when a DLCl s CIR changes Excess burst size Be and committed burst size Bc are recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to CIR The committed rate measurement interval Tc is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to Other June 2000 1 3 About FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitors 1 4 RMON Based User History Statistics Gathering Provides everything needed to monitor network service levels plus throughput with accurate data delivery network latency and LMI and PVC availability In addition port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links These statistics are available real time via the Enterprise MIB and historically as an RMON2 User History object In future releases of the OpenLane SLM system this will enable even more accurate calculations o
107. a Access Control MAC address assigned to the Ethernet port during manufacturing Current Software Revision Software version currently being used by the unit Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit but has not yet been implemented Format is the same as for the Current Software Revision In Progress indicates that the flash memory is currently being downloaded Invalid indicates that no download has occurred or the download was not successful Hardware Revision Unit s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digit number followed by two digits and one alphabetic character 6 2 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Front Panel LEDs 9820 A2 GB20 20 The FrameSaver SLV 9820 unit s faceplate includes LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the FrameSaver unit its network data port and its user data port 9820 2M t Ps om om FrameSaver SLV CED O O NETWORK PORT 00 16201a 01 Figure 6 1 Model 9820 2M Front Panel 9820 45M SYSTEM NETWORK PORT 1 x O mMO DO WO ALM O RD O RDO TST O DTR O DSR O FAN O DSRO DRO PWR O 00 16750 Figure 6 2 Model 9820 45M Front Panel June 2000 6 3 Monitoring Front Panel Status LEDs 6 4 Table 6 1 System Status LEDs Label Indication Color W
108. a Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically Removing a Circuit Setting Up Management Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site Setting Up Back to Back Operation Changing Operating Mode Configuration Option Tables Configuring the Overall System Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Configuring Service Level Verification Options Configuring General System Options Configuring the Physical Interfaces Configuring the Network Data Port Configuring the User Data Port June 2000 4 1 Configuration Options 4 2 Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface Manually Configuring DLC Records Configuring PVC Connections Setting Up Management and Communication Options Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Configuring SNMP NMS Security Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Configuring the Ethernet Port Model 9820 45M Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Configuring the Modem Port Model 9820 45M June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring Using the Easy Install Screen Model 9820 45M 9820 A2 GB20 20 The Easy Install screen provides direct access to t
109. access can be limited by Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the FrameSaver units Management Information Base MIB m Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB the community name must be supplied gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access types 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Assign SNMP community names Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access allowed Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read for the SNMP community names or Read Write 3 Save your changes See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 5 9 Security and Logins Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses An additional level of security is provided by Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NM
110. access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level 1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is disconnected Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 19 Modem Port Options 3 of 3 IP Address Pos
111. ake sure that the COM Terminal port s Port Access Level is set to Level 1 and that at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again A reset is required if the Communication Port s Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 4 12 General System Options Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity Enable Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected Display Conditions This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled 1 60 Up to an hour can be set 4 42 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20
112. all receptacle to rear panel connection Check that the power cord is securely attached at both ends The wall receptacle has no power Check the wall receptacle power by plugging in some equipment that is known to be working Check the circuit breaker Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power On Self Test fails The Alarm LED is on after power on The unit has detected an internal hardware failure Reset the unit and try again Contact your service representative Return the unit to the factory refer to Warranty Sales Service and Training Information on page A of this document Cannot access the FrameSaver unit or the menu driven user interface Login or password is incorrect COM Terminal port is misconfigured or the FrameSaver unit is otherwise configured so it prevents access Reset the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Control gt Reset Device Contact your service representative 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 8 11 Troubleshooting 8 12 Table 8 2 Device Problems 2 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Failure XXXXXXXX appears at the top of the System and Test Status screen at Self Test Results The unit detects an internal software failure Record the 8 digit code from the System and Test Status screen Reset the unit and try again Contact your service representativ
113. amount of down time Area of Concern Action Front Panel Assembly 1 Vacuum dust from air vents whenever a buildup is visible See Cleaning the Front Panel Assembly on page 12 2 2 Monitor LEDs for fan failures Replace the front panel assembly immediately upon failure See Replacing the Front Panel Assembly on page 12 3 3 Test LEDs periodically Replace the front panel assembly immediately upon failure See Replacing the Front Panel Assembly on page 12 3 Power Modules Monitor LEDs for power module failures Replace a failed power module immediately See Replacing a Power Module on page 12 4 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 12 1 Hardware Maintenance 9820 45M Cleaning the Front Panel Assembly The substantial airflow through the unit s four fans may cause dust to collect on the outside of the front air vents When dust becomes visible at the air vents run the brush attachment of a vacuum cleaner gently over the front panel to remove it In extremely dusty environments it may be necessary to remove the front panel assembly to clean the blades of the fans Refer all service to qualified personnel The procedure may be performed while the unit is running gt Procedure To clean the fans 1 Loosen the captive screws holding on the front panel A WARNING OVP 30 IN The fans continue to run until the fan power cable is removed Keep your hair and clothes away from the fan blades Carefull
114. and linkDown enterprise Specific RMON Specific These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table B 6 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Trap warmStart This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized Table B 3 warmStart Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmStart FrameSaver unit has just Reset command sent reinitialized and stabilized f Power disruption itself String Variable Binding Unit reset devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Trap authenticationFailure This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to lack of authentication Table B 4 authenticationFailure Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access to the FrameSaver SNMP protocol message not unit was attempted and properly authenticated failed Three unsuccessful attempts were made to enter a correct login user ID password combination IP Address security is enabled and a message was received from the SNMP Manager whose address was not on the lost of approved managers String Unauthorized access attempted Variable Binding devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 B 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps linkUp and linkDown These traps are supported
115. anmStatt 2 23 40 stccierrtesaaigmieimegeiendiotved Soecded B 7 Trap authenticationFailure 0 c cece cee eee B 7 Traps linkUp ancdinkKDOwil a5 occa0accssaseus dioisaseaddanteage B 8 Traps 6Nterprise Specie sicsicacsaaasdeiaaneeadaarorbawsadaaada B 12 Traps AMON SPECIO serato tht radi keE hk rE I EEn EREE one B 14 m RMON Alarm and Event Defaults 0 00 00 cece eee eee B 15 Network Synchronous Port Physical Interface Alarm Defaults B 16 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 000 2 eee eeeeee B 17 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 0202 00eeeeeee B 19 DEC Alarm Dela eraran a akee eea e neri B 21 m Object ID Cross References Numeric Order 2 2 00005 B 23 vi June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Contents C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments E Real Panels ccccrscnciaededuenarswacdaug gieeiedanadeengdaineannais C 2 m COM Terminal Port Connector 20 00 cece eee eee eee C 3 LAN Adapter Converter and Cable Models 9820 9820 2M DOCU EE S E I TOE I ERELTI E PIRE EO ATTE C 3 Standard EIA 232 Crossover Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9320 BM oari errr Waar nne Veit Pee lene ere eire bene tae C 4 m User and Network Data Port Connectors Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 0 cc eee eee eee C 6 X 21 Network Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M C 7 X 21 DTE Adapter Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M C 8 V 35 Network Cable Models 9820 9820 2M
116. at It Means OK Operational Green Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Status ON The interchange circuits for the port are in the correct state to transmit and receive data OFF The port is idle Occurs if the port is configured to monitor DSR CTS or RLSD and the leads are not asserted or TM is asserted on the DCE ora valid clock signal cannot be detected on the port LMI LMI OK Green Model 9820 45M The Local Management Interface is running on the frame relay link on the network interface TD Transmit Data Green Model 9820 45M Data is being sent or received on the circuit RD Receive Data Green DTR Data Terminal Green Model 9820 45M Current state of the control Ready lead DSR Data Set Ready Green Table 6 3 PORT Status LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means OK Operational Green Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M elas ON The interchange circuits for the port are in the correct state to transmit and receive data OFF The port is idle Occurs if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted TD Transmit Data Green Model 9820 45M Current state of the control lead RD Receive Data Green DTR Data Terminal Green Ready DSR Data Set Ready Green June 2000 6 5 Monitoring Displaying LEDs and Control Leads The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen allows you to monitor a remote unit and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems The appropri
117. ate interfaces are shown on this screen with the appropriate status highlighted Main Menu gt Status Display LEDs and Control Leads Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions LED and control lead descriptions are in the sections that follow Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M main status leds 9820 2M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 05 01 DISPLAY LEDS amp CONTROL LEADS DP FR NAM NETWORK1 Port 1 OK TXD RXD RLSD Ind DTR DSR RTS Control CTS for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh Table 6 4 General LEDs Label Indication What It Means OK Operational Status The unit has power and is operational Alarm Operational Alarm Fail The unit has just been reset or an error or fault has been detected Test Test Mode A test is in progress 6 6 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring 9820 A2 GB20 20 Table 6 5 Network and User Data Port LEDs and Control Leads Label Indication What It Means Both Network and User Data Ports OK Operational Status The data port is operational TXD Transmit Data Data is being sent to the far end device on the data port RXD Receive Data Data is being received from the far end device on the data port Additional Network Data Port Control Leads RLSD Receiver Line Signal If Port T
118. ate a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just created Configuration Management and Communication Management PVC Minimally enter the following options Name for the management PVC Interface IP Address and Subnet Mask if different from the Node s Primary Link for this Management PVC the user data port Primary DLCI i e the data port DLCI 3 Save the configuration See Table 4 8 DLCI Record Options and Table 4 11 Management PVC Options for configuration information 4 10 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Using the system s standard Routing Information Protocol RIP feature routing information is passed to the router over the management PVC so the router can learn routes to FrameSaver SLV devices Node IP information should be set up see Configuring Node IP Information B gt Procedure 1 Configure the router to receive RIP For example if using a Cisco router configure config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 then ctl z WR 2 Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records 3 Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured Configuration Management and Communication Management PVCs 4 Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out and Save the configuration Refer to Table 4 8 DLC Record Options and Table 4 11 Management PVC Option
119. ate measurement interval Tc June 2000 4 27 Configuration Options Table 4 8 DLCI Record Options 3 of 3 Excess Burst Size Bits Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames Be For FrameSaver SLV 9820 Possible Settings 0 128000 Default Setting 64000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M Possible Settings 0 2048000 Default Setting 1984000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M Possible Settings 0 8192000 Default Setting 8128000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 45M Possible Settings 0 44210000 Default Setting 44146000 Allows you to display or change the DLCl s excess burst size in bits 0 maximum burst size Specifies the maximum amount of data over the committed burst size that the network will attempt to deliver within the committed rate measurement interval Tc DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting High Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device also known as quality of service All data on user data Port 1 is cut through as long as there is no higher priority data queued from another user port The DLCI priority set for an interface applies to data coming into that interface For example the priority set for DLCls on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment such as a router This option has no eff
120. ation documentation training distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods m Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty at www paradyne com warranty Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE FrameSaver Hotwire and NextEDGE are registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation MVL OpenLane Performance Wizard and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Patent Notification FrameSaver SLV products are protected by U S Patents 5 550 700 and 5 654 966 Other patents are pending A June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Contents About This Guide 1 About FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitors
121. ay link that were above the excess information rate The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set 1 Only appears for the network interface June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Table 6 18 DLCI Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates With BECN Set The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Total Rx Frames Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes received Rx Octets for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link Within CIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate Between CIR amp EIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate Above EIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate m With DE Set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set With BECN Set The number of frames and octets received on the
122. blank no default Specifies the alternate frame relay interface to use for this management PVC if the primary link has failed The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Display Conditions This option appears only for Model 9820 45M Net1 FR1 Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection Alternate DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected and the primary link has failed The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI Display Conditions This option appears only for Model 9820 45M NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive Alternate EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate EDLC number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected and the primary link has failed EDLCIs identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to tho
123. ble Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal interface through the Modem port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login June 2000 4 59 Configuration Options 4 60 Table 4 19 Modem Port Options 2 of 3 Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for the asynchronous terminal interface accessed through the Modem port If a login is required for the port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access will be permitted for the port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing CAUTION Before changing the communication port s
124. can set up two FrameSaver units that are connected back to back without frame relay switches between them as ina test bench setup Changing Operating Mode When setting up back to back operation One unit must be configured for Standard operation which is the setting for normal operation The other unit must be configured for Back to Back operation so it presents the network side of the UNI user network interface Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed B gt Procedure To set up back to back operation 1 On the unit to be configured for Back to Back operation manually configure DLCls DLCls should be configured before connecting the two units 2 Access the Change Operating Mode screen Main Menu gt Control Change Operating Mode 3 Select Back to Back Operation and respond Yes to the Are you sure prompt 4 Save the change B gt Procedure To return the unit to normal operation 1 Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard Operation 2 Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change The units can be reconnected to a standard frame relay network 4 12 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuration Option Tables Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order even though this may not be the order in which you access them when configuring the unit The following configuration option tables are included
125. ce Statistics Model 9820 45M The following statistics appear when Ethernet is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Ethernet All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 222 2 then the count starts over Table 6 20 Frame Relay Performance Statistics Field or Statistic What It Indicates Port Rate Mbps The operating rate detected on the Ethernet interface One of 10 The Ethernet port rate is 10 Mbps 100 The Ethernet port rate is 100 Mbps Disabled The Ethernet interface was disabled after this screen was first displayed Duplex The duplexing mode of the Ethernet port One of Full The Ethernet port is operating in full duplex 4 wire mode Half The Ethernet port is operating in half duplex 2 wire mode Disabled The Ethernet interface was disabled after this screen was first displayed Frames Transmitted The number of frames transmitted over the interface Frames Received The number of frames received over the interface Errored Frames The number of frames with internal transmit and receive errors transmitter and receiver overruns receive checksum errors alignment errors and long frame errors Excessive Collisions The number of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Carrier Sense Errors The number of times the lack of carrier caused an error in
126. cified multiplexed DLCI and link When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted as long as the condition exists Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network service provider Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Two users with Level 1 security access are in session with the device Alert the other user before starting tests or altering configuration options Yellow at Network 1 9820 45M A yellow alarm signal is received on the network Cable problem T3 facility problem Check that the associated cables are securely attached Contact your network provider 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network data port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting Tables Troubleshooting The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble free service However if a problem occurs refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible solutions Device Problems Table 8 2 Device Problems 1 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power or the LEDs are not lit The power cord is not securely plugged into the w
127. cuit on the network data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the unit When this condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Display Conditions This option does not appear when when Port Type is set to X 21 The signal is assumed to be asserted Enable Interchange circuit CC ITU CCITT 107 DSR is monitored to determine when valid data is being sent from the DCE Disable DSR is not monitored DSR is assumed to be asserted and data is transmitted regardless of the actual state of the lead Monitor CTS Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the Clear to Send CTS circuit on the network data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the unit When this condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M or when Port Type is set to X 21 The signal is assumed to be asserted Enable Interchange circuit CB ITU CCITT 106 CTS is monitored to determine whether data should be transmitted to the DCE Disable CTS is not monitored CTS is assumed to be asserted and data is transmitted regardless of the actual state of the lead
128. d 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive Primary Link RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting For multiplexed DLCls Proprietary For nonmultiplexed DLCIs Standard_out For Model 9820 45M None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment None Does not use a routing protocol Proprietary Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCls see Table 4 8 DLCI Record Options Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information only about other FrameSaver SLV units in the network This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCls NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the FrameSaver unit for the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR See Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 4 38 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 11 Management PVC Options 4 of 4 Alternate Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially
129. d enterprise specific traps are listed below Table B 8 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 1 of 2 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseCIR devFrExtDicilflndex CIR has changed due to the LMI Change 15 devFrExt mib report LMI Protocol is set to a devErExtDlciDIci ees and the network s CIR devFrExt mib i String z ea CIR on ifString changed to devFrExt mib CIR bps devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterpriseConfig devLastTrapString Configuration has been changed Change 6 devHealthAndStatus via the menu driven user mib interface an SNMP Manager or auto configuration after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change String Device configuration change enterpriseDLCI devFrExtDicilflndex The DLCI has been deleted The delete 17 devFrExt mib network no longer supports the devFrExtDlciDIci DLCI and it was removed devFrExt mib Strings devLastTrapString ue deleted by Auto DLCl devHealthAndStatus i enterpriseDLCI mib DLCI Status is set to Inactive the Down 11 DLCI is down enterpriseDLCIUp 12 Strings ifString down Due to LMI or physical failure ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI is up again String ifString up enterpriseLinkSpeed iflndex RFC 1573 Speed has change
130. d Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log Once the capture buffer or trace log is full the oldest packets are overwritten To view the most recently captured packets using the menu driven user interface LMI Packet Capture Utility gt Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Example main control lmi_capture display_log 9820 2M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 6 01 LMI TRACE LOG Page 1 of 3 Packets Transmitted to Net1 FR Packets Received from Net1 FR1 LMI Record 1 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 LMI Record 2 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rev Seq 177 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp PgDn Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI messages The following information is provided m The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet 1 8000 and the amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured The maximum amount of time displayed is 4 294 967 seconds s which is reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded m The type of message either Status or Status Enquiry from the captured packet and the number of bytes in the packet The LMI Type ident
131. d Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be downloaded describes the unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features and describes the RMON specific user history groups and alarm and event defaults Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Shows the rear panel tells what cables are needed and provides pin assignments for interfaces and cables Technical Specifications Equipment List Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library gt Technical Manuals gt Technical Glossary June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 About This Guide Product Related Documents Document Number Document Title Paradyne FrameSaver Documentation 9820 A2 GL10 FrameSaver SLV Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M and 9820 45M Quick Reference 9820 A2 GN10 FrameSaver SLV Models 9820 9820 2M and 9820 8M Installation Instructions 9820 A2 GN11 FrameSaver SLV Model 9820 45M Installation Instructions Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation 7800 A2 GZ41 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions 7800 A2 GZ42 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions NetScout Documentation 2930 170 NetScout Probe User Guide 2930 610 NetScout Manager Plus Use
132. d administration icons appear in the box below the application bar Help wv Application Admin Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Select the Add button down the center of the screen Minimally enter the following Agent name IP address Properties File Select paradyne Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent discover its DLCls and return to the Configuration Manager main window The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box with its DLCls in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen Select the Test button fourth button down center of the screen to make sure you can communicate with the agent Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 10 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Verifying Domains and Groups Models 9820 and 9820 2M 9820 A2 GB20 20 B gt Procedure From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Configuration Manager File Password wv Agent w AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay Domain yk Belsg vy Pravy See IP Address Properties File fw42prop Shared w Custom 135 67 Add 135 90 153 3 Samples In
133. d as a result Change 14 ifSpeed RFC 1573 the Autorate algorithm String devLastTrapString Speed of ifName changed to devHealthAndStatus ifSpeed bps mib June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 8 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 2 of 2 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseMissedSLV _ devFrExtDicilflndex SLV Timeout Error Event Down 16 devFrExt mib Threshold has been exceeded devFrExtDiciDici String devFrExt mib SLV down on ifString due to a excessive SLV packet loss Total devFrExtDiciMissed SLVs devFrExt mib SLV packets lost is numLost enterpriseMissedSLV a devLastTrapString SLV Timeout Error Event has Up 116 devHealthAndStatus been cleared mib String SLV up on ifString because SLV communication was reestablished Total SLV packets lost is numLost enterpriseRMON devLastTrapString All RMON related option ResetToDefault 13 devHealthAndStatus changes have been reset to their mib default values Default Factory Configuration settings have been reloaded returning RMON related options to their original settings String RMON database reset to defaults enterpriseSelfTest devLastTrapString Unit has completed Fail 2 devHealthAndStatus re initialization and a hardware mib failure was detected String Self test failed s s is the con
134. de 6 4 6 6 6 8 Status messages DBM Tests aborting 8 16 available 8 14 DTE Loopback 8 20 Duration 4 18 IP Ping 8 21 Lamp 8 22 physical 8 20 PVC PVC Loopback 8 18 starting or stopping 8 15 test pattern Timeout 4 18 8 14 through PVC connections total number throughput time setting Timeout Inactivity 4 42 4 54 4 60 Test 8 14 TM control lead trademarks A traffic policing 4 14 Training A transferring data Transmit Clock Invert Source 4 21 Trap Dial Out Disconnect Managers Number of Traps authentificationFailure DLCI Enterprise Specific Event Log 6 38 General Link Link Interfaces linkUp and linkDown IN 10 RMON RMON Specific B 14 SNMP and dial out options standards supported warmStart Trend report 11 7 troubleshooting creating a management link 4 32 device problems 8 11 frame relay PVC problems management link power supply problems tables 8 11 TruePut TS Management Link Access Level 4 35 access level limiting Telnet access TST LED TXD control lead Type Access U UNI 1 3 4 15 4 24 4 25 upgrading system software upload download capability uploading data user data port connector data rate 4 21 LED rates supported user history adding files 10 13 installing files 10 15 monitoring DLCI 10 16
135. dem is disconnected An SNMP trap is generated Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Password combination If two sessions are already active wait and try again f attempting to access the unit through Telnet the local Telnet client process returns a Connection refused message f attempting to access the unit over the COM or Terminal port or Modem port not via Telnet the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed The type of connection Telnet connection direct COM or Terminal port connection or direct Modem port connection for each current user is identified along with the user s login ID B gt Procedure To end the session 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function keys area of the screen 2 Type e Exit and press Enter For a COM Terminal port connected terminal the session is ended For a modem port connected terminal the session is ended and the modem is disconnected For a Telnet connection the session is closed and if no other Telnet or FTP session is occurring over the connection the modem is disconnected If ending a session from the Configuration branch see Saving Configuration Options in Chapter 3 Configuration Procedures 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 2 3 User Interface and Basic Operation Main Menu Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit s tasks begins at the Main Menu which has five menus or bra
136. ds 2 200 cece eee eee 4 26 Conliguring PVG Connections c2ctasectednduddiwbetcegdisuieede ead 4 29 Setting Up Management and Communication Options 4 32 Configuring Node IP Information 00 cece eee eee 4 32 Configuring Management PVCs 00000 cece eee eee 4 36 Configuring General SNMP Management 0005 4 40 Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 4 41 Configuring SNMP NMS Security 00 cece eee eee 4 44 Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out 4 45 Configuring the Ethernet Port Model 9820 45M 4 50 Configuring the Communication Port 000 cee eee 4 52 Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 000e cece eeee 4 57 Configuring the Modem Port Model 9820 45M 4 59 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Contents 5 Security and Logins 6 Monitoring 9820 A2 GB20 20 Limiting ACCESS 22 ccatsiwatadietetvwieddeiad ki tivedetnedtiaeddd 5 2 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 00000eee eee 5 3 Controlling External COM Port Device Access Models 9820 9820 2M JOZU BNI ss eecvices i cectriare ei sb to ashs Ge dgah asain hichi a creas tues tence needs gue dias ees 5 4 Controlling Modem Port Device Access Model 9820 45M 5 4 Controlling Telnet or FTP ACCESS 0 002 e cece eee eee eae 5 5 Limiting Te
137. e They are created during RMON initialization and put into the Paradyne defined alarm area Table B 10 Network Synchronous Port Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Unavailable D MIB pdn_SyncPortStats mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Seconds Tag devSyncPortStatsUASs 15mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 6 5 1 1 2 1 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link B 16 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit s frame relay link interfaces They are created during RMON initialization Table B 11 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Invalid Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 15 mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Short Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1S mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Long Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong T5imins O
138. e Rate kbps Session function keys 2 7 IN 4 June 2000 G General LEDs 6 4 options 4 18 SNMP management options 4 40 Traps 4 46 generating reports 11 6 glossary grouping elements for reports 11 5 H hardware bypass hardware revision NAM HDLC errors frame relay statistics Health and Status messages 6 18 history adding files 10 13 installing files 10 15 monitoring DLCI 10 16 hyperlink to more information highlighted text I Identity displaying Ignore Control Leads 4 53 Inactivity Timeout COM port 4 54 Modem port 4 60 indicator LEDs power supply Initial Route Destination 4 46 installation and setup Network Health installing Network Health user history files 10 15 interface specifications Internal Transmit Clock Inverse ARP Invert Internal Clock Invert Transmit Clock IP default destination 4 34 node information 4 32 Ping test 8 21 Validation NMS 9820 A2 GB20 20 IP Address for COM port 4 55 for Ethernet port for Modem port 4 61 limiting SNMP access through NMS number 4 44 4 45 Node IP Routing Table Status screen K keyboard keys keys keyboard screen function 2 7 L Lamp Test LAN adapter and cable latency LEDs and control leads displaying descriptions front panel 6 3 power supply lights power supply limiting async terminal access
139. e Settings Independent Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Default Setting Independent Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to another determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state Sometimes referred to as LMI pass through Independent Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface Provides LMI Spoofing This is the recommended setting when backup is configured and for Network Service Providers NSPs Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads When LMI on Port 1 comes back up the network interface is reenabled The LMI state on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port 1 That is the network interface s LMI follows Port 1 s LMI Used at central sites this setting is useful when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure Not recommended for NSPs Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads When LMI on the network interface comes back up Port 1
140. e and provide the 8 digit failure code An LED appears dysfunctional LED is burned out Run the Lamp Test If the LED in question does not flash with the other LEDs then contact your service representative Not receiving data Network cable loose or broken Reconnect or repair the cable Call the network service provider Receiving data errors on a multiplexed DLCI but frame relay is okay Frame Relay Discovery is being used for automatic DLCI and PVC configuration The equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 1490 compliant Change the DLCI Type for each network DLCI from Multiplexed to Standard turning off multiplexing June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Frame Relay PVC Problems Table 8 3 Frame Relay PVC Problems Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No receipt or transmission of data Cross Connection of the DLCls are configured incorrectly Verify the PVC connections and DLCls by checking the network discovered DLCls on the LMI Reported DLCls screen DLCI is inactive on the frame relay network m Verify that the DLCI s is active on the PVC Connection Status screen If the DLCI s is not active contact the service provider Verify the LMI Reported DLCI field on the Interface Status screen DTE is configured incorrectly Check the DTE s configuration LMI is not configured properly for the DTE
141. e configuration options that are applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s See Chapter 2 User Interface and Basic Operation for additional information When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete NOTE Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run tests Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options they cannot change configuration options or run tests June 2000 3 5 Configuration Procedures Saving Configuration Options When changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save your changes to either the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas NOTE When changing settings you must Save for changes to take effect B gt Procedure To save the configuration option changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen 2 Type sor S to select the Save function and press Enter The Save Configuration To screen appears NOTE If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response If you select No the Main M
142. e current directory on the FrameSaver node to the specified directory dir directory Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node to the local directory on the host for configuration files only remotehelp command Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a list of all Known commands is printed Is directory Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory s contents If no directory is specified the current one is used put file file2 Copy file from a local directory on the host to file 2in the current directory of the FrameSaver node If file2 is not specified the file will be named file on the FrameSaver node recv file1 file 2 Same as a get send file1 file 2 Same as a put pwd Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit node bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode June 2000 7 3 FTP Operation Upgrading System Software If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit s program code you must transfer the upgrade of the nam ocd file in the system memory directory using the put command NOTE Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC or through the COM Terminal port if Port Use is set to Net Link see Table
143. e eee eee 11 6 About Service Level Reports 20000 eeeeeee eee aes 11 6 About At a Glance Reports 00 cee cece eee eee eee 11 6 About Trend Reports oicccwteve stots ciedweteduaadae beheaded 11 7 PrMeEG REPOS 6 stciwetaas e eaa seus acs 11 7 Reports Applicable to SLV Devices 0 0 ccc eee eee 11 7 12 Hardware Maintenance 9820 45M 9820 A2 GB20 20 eea EELEE TE EE EEE EL e ee eed Deena See eens E 12 1 Cleaning the Front Panel Assembly 000 cece eee eens 12 2 Replacing the Front Panel Assembly 2200 eee cece 12 3 Replacing a Power Module 000 cece eee eee eee ees 12 4 June 2000 v Contents A Menu Hierarchy Ms MENUS xc catadiccstacmaiainc igieh e Aas guia ohana oad Aea Ghd aes A 1 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB SUPPO cea itcadicactdbaasetaweitaeseccidatsadacaisadaadass B 2 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps 00 cece eee eae B 2 E System Group IMID 2 cit cat taci die doa irinn a anana B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 0202 00 eee eeee B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 00005 B 3 m Intenaces Group MID 2 cccctvandaxgedacimdatnetbindabasdedtmdad B 4 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 4 NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 5 m Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps 0000e cece eens B 6 Trap W
144. e specified DLCI on the frame relay link Send Pttn Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 The unit is monitoring the selected test pattern on the specified DLCI for the interface 1 2 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Network LMl reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status LMI Reported DLCIs The LMI Reported DLCls screen displays the status and CIR if supported by the switch for each DLCI whether the DLCI is configured or not LMI Reported DLCls Status Screen Example main status 1lmi_dlcis Device Name Node A DLCI 300 305 400 410 411 420 430 501 511 520 DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link Refresh PgUp STATUS Active Inactive Deleted Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Inactive Active Active PgDn frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs CIR bps 16000 256000 64000 STATUS Active Active Deleted Active Active Active ESC for previous menu PrevLink 9820 2M 05 13 2000 5 04 Page 1 of 2 CIR bps 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000 MainMenu Exit An asterisk next to the DLCI indicate
145. ead Only Displays the DLCl s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval Tc in milliseconds This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst Size Bc Bits and CIR bps options Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Possible Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies whether the DLCI s committed burst size will follow the CIR or whether it will be entered independently This value is the maximum amount of data that the service provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval Tc CIR Uses the value in the CIR bps option as the committed burst size Bc The Bc and excess burst size Be options are updated when a CIR update is received from the network switch Other Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLC When Other is selected the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained as well Bc Possible Settings For FrameSaver SLV 9820 0 128000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M 0 2048000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M 0 8192000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 45M 0 44210000 Default Setting 64000 Allows you to display or change the DLCl s committed burst size in bits Display Conditions This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to Other 0 maximum burst size Specifies the maximum amount of data that the network has agreed to deliver within the committed r
146. ead Write Save your changes June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Security and Logins See Configuring SNMP NMS Security Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options Creating a Login A login is required if security is enabled Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the communication port and Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session Up to six login ID password combinations can be created using ASCII text and each login must have a specified access level Logins must be unique and they are case sensitive gt Procedure To create a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu gt Control gt Administer Logins 2 Select New and set the following configuration options as appropriate In the field Enter the Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter password Password again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 Level 1 User can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing Level 2 User can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 User can only monitor and display status and configuration screens CAUTION Make sure at least one login is set
147. ect Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or changing Management PVCs see Table 4 11 First DLCI records must have been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside See Manually Configuring DLC Records for additional information Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs m When you select New the configuration option field is blank m When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID number that you specified From this screen you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens Select the Delete function key a Management PVC ID and respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt for quick removal of unused DLCls If the Management PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination a Default IP Destination or a TS Management Link an Are You Sure prompt appears to warn you Table 4 11 Management PVC Options 1 of 4 Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens e g London for the London office Enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 8 characters Intf IP Address Possible
148. ect when there is only one user data port Display Conditions This option is not available for the network interface or for Model 9820 45M Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this DLCI to the network Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port or for Model 9820 45M Low Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLC has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority 4 28 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring PVC Connections 9820 A2 GB20 20 The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections and their DLCI Records PVC Connections can also be created manually see Table 4 9 Main Menu gt Configuration gt PVC Connections From this screen you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens Quick removal of unused DLCls included in an existing PVC Connection except for HQ Site is also available when the Delete function key is selected and y
149. ed in the NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers inclusive NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps June 2000 4 45 Configuration Options Table 4 15 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 2 of 5 Initial Route Destination Possible Settings AutoRoute COM PVCname Default Setting AutoRoute Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager When proprietary RIP is active only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management link as the initial destination All other units can use the default setting Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option AutoRoute Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager or the Default IP Destination when no route is available in the routing tab
150. efault Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its IP address cannot be matched here access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding Access Type Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the NMS IP address Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros Access Type Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Read Allows read only access SN
151. eived SLVFramesRec Current Latency CurrentLatency These alarms and current values can be found in NSHOME ustr slvtemplate fet which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms This file can be copied and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values The copied fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all DLCls on the unit using the eztrap utility All fct files must be in NSHOME usr To configure alarms manually see Adding SLV Alarms Manually NOTE Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure below If you have an NT system please install Perl before proceeding B gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Type eztrap i filename fct o agentname fct agentname and press Enter to run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCls for the copied fct file The message eztrap done appears when the fct file is transferred 3 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 4 Edit any alarm values that need to be changed 5 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to load alarms for the unit This may take some time so please be patient See Editing Alarms if any default settings need to be changed
152. enLane management solution SNMP security options Node IP Address Subnet Mask 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Node IP configuration option tables NSP NTU Number of Managers Trap Managers 4 45 O odd parity 4 53 OID object identification user history file 10 13 cross reference numeric order B 24 B 28 OK LED OpenLane SLM solution SLM support operating changing mode for demos organization of this document Out of Sync message 8 13 8 19 Outbound Management Priority P packet capture uploading data utility 8 5 packets 4 37 Parity 4 53 Password patents A pattern send monitor performance statistics clearing 6 29 Performance Wizard copying directory physical data port options tests 8 20 pin assignments COM Port EIA 232 connector COM port to LAN cables crossover cable EIA 232 DB25 to DB25 straight through cable C 14 EIA 530 A connector V 35 DTE adapter C 12 V 35 network cable X 21 DTE adapter cable X 21 network cable 9820 A2 GB20 20 Index Ping test policing of CIR and EIR Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Access Level 4 54 4 60 5 3 bursting communication options 4 52 control leads Ethernet options 4 50 Modem options 4 59 PVC Loopback 8 18 Type network data port Type user data port Use 4 52 4 59 POST enable disable power module replacing 12
153. enu screen reappears and the changes are not saved If you select Yes the Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes usually the Current Configuration and press Enter When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations like SNMP and Auto Configuration Since multiple sessions can be active at the same time the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes being made For instance Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration changes made via another method to be lost If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and saves them your changes would be lost Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units At a minimum the following configuration options must be set before deploying a a FrameSaver unit to a remote site m Node IP Address m Node Subnet Mask 3 6 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options 9820 A2 GB20 20 This chapter includes the following Configuring Using the Easy Install Screen Model 9820 45M Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Setting Up for Trap Dial Out Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial Out Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out Setting Up Auto Configuration Selecting
154. er is applied 6 10 and the power module is functioning When the yellow front panel System PWR LED is lit one of the power modules has failed The failed power module can be identified from the back of the DSU by its unlit LED Table 6 8 Power Module Troubleshooting Configuration Symptom What to Do in order if problem persists One Power No front panel LEDs are Module lit 1 Verify that the receptacle in use provides 120 Vac Verify that the power module switch is in the On position Replace the power module See Replacing a Power Module in Chapter 12 Hardware Maintenance Call your service representative Two Power No front panel LEDs are Modules lit Verify that the receptacles in use provide 120 Vac Verify that the power module switches are in the On position Replace the power modules See Replacing a Power Module in Chapter 12 Hardware Maintenance Call your service representative The front panel System PWR LED is lit Check the power module LEDs from the back of the unit and replace the failed power module the one whose LED is off See Replacing a Power Module in Chapter 12 Hardware Maintenance Call your service representative June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Device Messages Monitoring These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens All device messages are listed in alphabetical order Table 6 9 Device
155. erates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all interfaces except for the COM Terminal port that are applicable to the FrameSaver model DLCI Traps on Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports All None Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCls These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces Network Generates these trap messages on DLCls for the network interface only Ports Generates these trap messages for DLCls on a user data port only All Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces None Model 9820 45M No linkUp and linkDown trap messages are generated RMON Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups of RMON1 when a selected variable s configured threshold is exceeded Enable Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Disable Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 4 47 Configuration Options Table 4 15 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 4 of 5 Trap Dial Out Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether SNMP trap messages initiate a ca
156. erface SIguiSiccicccrceeend beereteade heacteedetg denen 6 25 IP Routing Table Model 9820 45M 0 0c e eee e eee eee 6 26 PEMOMMANCE Statistics no cigalisedsgesrieisaccigideieadeieabasedgs 6 28 Clearing Performance Statistics 0 00 c cece ee eee 6 29 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 6 30 DLCI Performance Statistics 00sec eee ERIR EE 6 32 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 00eeeeeee 6 34 Ethernet Performance Statistics Model 9820 45M 6 37 Trap Event Log Model 9820 45M 000 c eee e cece ees 6 38 June 2000 iii Contents 7 8 9 iv FTP Operation PTR Ale Tiansiel ccc icsnad dan atendimeaseenedeinadaesasanagaad 7 2 Upgrading System Software 0000 e eee 7 4 Determining Whether a Download Is Completed T6 Change SOWIE scent utieiigectabneieiet shagtettwisinersa 7 5 Transferring Collected Data 20 cece eee eens 7 6 Troubleshooting a PRODISHHIAGICAIOS 2 circ cece Serer amend Gesiwhbie basta giade eed 8 2 Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication 8 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu 000055 8 3 Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 0005 8 3 Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit 8 4 Troubleshooting Management Link Feature 00e0e eee 8 5 LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature
157. erface type the ifDescr and the iflndex that Paradyne has assigned to each Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer Sync Data Port Synchronous Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003001 S01P1 Data Port Port 1 DP FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Network Sync Network Synchronous Network Synchronous 101003002 Data Port Data Port Data Port Slot 1 Port 2 S01P2 DP FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh COM Communications port COM Port DP FR NAM 101004001 Terminal port on Hardware Version hhhh hhh 9820 45M Modem Modem port Modem Port DP FR NAM 101005001 9820 45M only Hardware Version hhhh hhh Ethernet LAN port Ethernet Port DP FR NAM 101006001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay Logical Layer FR UNI Frame relay logical For the user side 101016001 link on the Synchronous Data Port of FR Synchronous DTE Slot 1 Port 1 DP FR Data Port NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 DP FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical For the user side 101016002 link on the Network Synchronous Data Port Network Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot 1 Port 1 DP FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Network Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 1 DP FR NAM Hardware Version
158. es can be downloaded quickly using the default settings or at a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed Based upon TCP flow control the FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M which has a fixed rate 1 maximum receive rate Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum management speed June 2000 4 43 Configuration Options Configuring SNMP NMS Security Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to display add or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver unit to set up trap managers see Table 4 14 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP Table 4 14 SNMP NMS Security Options NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Only allows access when the sending manager s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 D
159. essary to support general IP communications for the node see Table 4 10 When deploying units to remote sites minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication Node IP This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting TS Management Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer TS_Management_Link is initially disabled in most models but the link can be enabled at any time Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard DLCI can be used When enabled a troubleshooting link can be accessed any time the service provider requests access An assigned security level can also control access When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link the link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry screen with the This PVC has been designated as the TS Management Link message NOTE The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already set up e g 980 4 32 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 10 Node IP Options 1 of 3 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear
160. esses of the SLV units to be located and the Community String Community Name in the FrameSaver unit The Community String is case sensitive 3 Select the Discover button The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens showing the results of the discovery process A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network it could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all elements in the network See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to the database 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 11 3 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Configuring the Discovered Elements Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for the first time For a FrameSaver SLV unit the speed set would be the unit s CIR No additional configuration should be required However you should verify that all appropriate information has been retrieved NOTE If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured or if it is not configured correctly Network Health sets the unit s CIR to 0 kbps For this reason you should reconfigure the units CIR before Network Health polls it If 0 kbps is the speed setting you will need to ed
161. et capture data Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu gt Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility LMI packet capture data is not available readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active Perform a get of the Imitrace syc file One of the following responses appears File Transfer Complete File Transfer Failed Permission Denied The LMI Packet Capture data was not readable or was a null file Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try again 5 Close the FTP session SLV statistics and or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting 9820 A2 GB20 20 This chapter includes the following Problem Indicators Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit Troubleshooting Management Link Feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface Alarms Troubleshooting Tables Device Problems Frame Relay PVC Problems Tests Available Test Timeout Feature Starting and Stopping a Test Aborting All Tests PVC Tests Network or Port Internal PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity June 2000 8 1 Troubleshooting m Physical Tests DTE Loopback P
162. ettings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies the rate for the COM Terminal port in kilobits per second 9 6 115 2 kbps Sets the communication port speed The 57 6 and 115 2 speeds are not available on the Model 9820 45M Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character NOTE Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits Use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 17 Communication Port Options 2 of 5 Parity Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM Terminal port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number Each character of transmitted data is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd Siop Bits Pos
163. f utilization Network User History Synchronization Allows correlation of RMON2 User History statistics among all SLV devices in a network for more accurate OpenLane SLV reports Using a central clock called the network reference time all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the network further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports Extensive Testing Capability Provides a variety of tests to identify and diagnose device network and other problems These tests can be commanded from the unit s menu driven user interface or the OpenLane system using its easy to use Diagnostic Troubleshooting feature Dedicated Troubleshooting PVC Provides a troubleshooting management link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network This feature can be configured from the menu driven user interface Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported FrameSaver FrameSaver FrameSaver FrameSaver Feature SLV 9820 SLY 9820 2M SLV 9820 8M_ SLV 9820 45M Through 16 120 250 512 Connections PVCs Dedicated 2 2 2 2 Management PVCs Router Independence Unique diagnostics performance monitoring PVC based in band network management and SNMP connectivity is not dependent upon external routers cables or LAN adapters Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support so the frame relay router at one end of a managemen
164. fan starts spinning as soon as the fan power cable is reconnected Keep your hair and clothes away from the fan blades 4 Take the new front panel and connect the LED cable then connect the fan power cable Verify that all four fans are running 5 Replace the front panel and tighten the captive screws Verify that the FAN LED is turned off CAUTION Do not leave the front panel assembly off the unit for extended periods or the unit will overheat 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 12 3 Hardware Maintenance 9820 45M Replacing a Power Module 12 4 A power module requires replacement in a FrameSaver SLV 9820 45M when The front panel System PWR LED is lit This means that one of the power modules has failed Power is applied to a power module and it is switched on but the power module LED does not light Refer all service to qualified personnel gt Procedure To replace a power module 1 For asystem with redundant power determine which power module still has its power LED lit This is the functional power supply A WARNING Do not pull out a power module until the power cord has been removed Remove the power cord from the failed power module Unscrew the captive screw holding the failed power module in place Pull out the power module and set it aside a F oO DN Slide in the new power module until it seats in its connector Verify that the switch is in the Off position D Tighten the captive screw 7
165. gin screen and no security records had been defined No action needed Enter a security record June 2000 6 13 Monitoring 6 14 Table 6 9 Device Messages 4 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Not enough circuits available A new TS Access DLCI was selected but the maximum number of network DLCls or management PVCs has already been created Delete a DLCI then create the new DLCI Note This PVC has been designated as the TS Management Link The Management PVC you displayed is defined as the TS Management Link No action needed The PVC cannot be modified No VCls available on All virtual circuits for the Select a different VPI VPI VPI have been assigned in other DLCI records or Management PVCs Password Matching Password entered in the Try again Error Re enter Password Re enter Password field of the Administer Logins screen does not match what was entered in the Password field Contact your system administrator to verify your password Permission Denied Seen at an FTP A file transfer was attempted but the terminal User did not have See your system administrator Level 1 security to get your security level changed Wrong file was specified Try again entering the correct when the put command file with the put command was entered User attempted to Enter the put command upload a program file instead of
166. hat It Means OK Power and Operational Status Green ON OFF FrameSaver unit has power and it is operational FrameSaver unit is in a power on self test or there is a failure ALM Operational Alarm Fail Red ON OFF These alarms appear on the System and Test Status screen See Health and Status Messages for additional information FrameSaver unit has just been reset or an error or fault has been detected Error fault alarm conditions Clock Out of Range CTS Down DLCI Down DTR Down LMI Down Loss of Signal LOS Self Test Failed SLV Timeout Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device No failures have been detected TST Test Mode Yellow ON OFF Loopback or test pattern is in progress initiated locally remotely or from the network No tests are active FAN 9820 45M Fan Failure Yellow ON OFF At least one fan has failed and the unit is in danger of overheating Fans are operational PWR 9820 45M Power Failure Yellow ON OFF One of the power supplies has failed and redundant power is no longer available Both power supplies are operational or only one power supply is installed June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring 9820 A2 GB20 20 Table 6 2 NETWORK Status LEDs Label Indication Color Wh
167. he FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins Chapter 6 Monitoring Shows how to display unit identification information and perform file transfers as well as how to display and interpret status and statistical information Chapter 7 FTP Operation Shows how to use File Transfer Protocol to upgrade system software and transfer collected data Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Provides device problem resolution alarm and other information as well as troubleshooting and test procedures 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 ix About This Guide Section Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Index Description Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Identifies where installation and setup information is located and how FrameSaver units are supported Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of the NetScout Manager Plus application so it supports FrameSaver units Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of Concord s Network Health application so reports can be created for FrameSaver units and identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units Hardware Maintenance 9820 45M Describes maintenance of the 9820 45M including replacement of the front panel assembly and power modules Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the user interface screens are organized SNMP MIBs an
168. he Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens see the window in Editing Alarms 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Add button to the right of the list The Add Trap window opens Add Trap Stats Type Ethernet Stats Trap Yariable Drop Events Keyt Key2 f Absolute _ Delta Rising _ Falling Both Rising Falling Threshold Severity Script i al Description Rising Threshold Reached Falling Threshold Reached Community public public Trap Number 2 Check every 50 seconds Cancel 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 10 11 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 4 Click on the button to the right of indicated fields for a drop down list from which selections can be made Minimally configure the following fields Field Select or Enter Domain User Defined DLCI DLCI number for trap being assigned Stats Type PARADYNE Trap Variable Trap variable to be configured Key1 The iflndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1 Key2 DLCI number same as DLCI above Type Absolute or Delta radio button Rising Falling or Both radio button 2 Threshold Value that will trigger a trap 1 Latency MIB variables should be Absolute all others should be Delta 2 Genera
169. he configuration options required to establish communication and prepare for Auto Configuration Main Menu Easy Install Table 4 1 Easy Install Configuration Options 1 of 2 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC This address may be shared only among management PVCs 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 TS Access Type Possible Settings None DLCI Default Setting None Specifies whether a DLCI is def
170. he path is operational Select Procedure 1 to ping any far end FrameSaver device To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver device and the central site NMS During a remote site installation an IP Ping test is typically run from the remote site to ping the NMS at the central site The remote FrameSaver device must have SNMP trap managers configured and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS Select Procedure 2 to ping the NMS at the central site To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central site FrameSaver unit The remote FrameSaver device must have configured the SNMP trap managers to be sent the ping Select Procedure 2 to ping the SNMP trap managers B gt Procedure 1 To ping any far end FrameSaver device 1 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test gt IP Ping 2 Enter the IP Address of the device the ping is being sent to then select Start NOTE If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized or the far end device has just initialized it may take about a minute for the devices to learn the routes via the proprietary RIP 3 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing w
171. hen Port Use is set to Net Link None No routing is used Proprietary Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing information only between devices to enable routing of IP traffic Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the COM Terminal port configured as the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR To create this management interface make sure that Node or COM Terminal port IP Information has been set up Configuring Node IP Information June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 9820 A2 GB20 20 For all models except Model 9820 45M select External Modem Com Port to display or change the configuration options that control call processing for an external device attached to the COM port see Table 4 18 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt External Modem Com Port NOTE A standard EIA 232 D crossover cable is required when connecting an external modem to the FrameSaver unit s COM Port See Standard EIA 232 D Crossover Cable in Ap
172. her end Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Dropped SLV The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a Responses response from the far end device has not been received Inbound Dropped Total number of frames transmitted by the far end device that Frames were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 4 3 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear Above CIR The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit Within CIR The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit Between CIR amp EIR The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit Above EIR The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit 6 30 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Table 6 1
173. hese alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created For Models 9820 and 9820 2M they are put into the NetScout alarm area for Models 9820 8M and 9820 45M they are grouped with the DLC Alarm Defaults in the Paradyne area Table B 13 identifies alarm defaults that do not change and Table B 14 identifies alarm defaults that change when the interface s line speed changes The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider Up to eight alarms per interface are allowed Any additional alarms are added to the Paradyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software See Editing Alarms in Chapter 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Table B 13 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Current Latency A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be 0 Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest 1 min configured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Average Latency A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs None Must be 0 Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 15 mins configured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Frames Received D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1
174. hhhh hhh June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with NetScout Probes use the following ifName ifDescr and iflndex Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information 9820 A2 GB20 20 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Frame Relay Logical Layer Frame Relay 4 Network Synchronous For the user side 4 Network Data Port RMON IN OUT Network V 35 X 21 Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot 1 Port 2 DP FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side RMON IN OUT Network Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot 1 Port 2 DP FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh RMON Logical Layer RMON Frame These values are OUT RMON IN 17 48 Relay Logical calculated ifName of the interface Interfaces For the DTE 9720 and iflndex 1 2 17 9820 2M ifIndex 1 2 17 OUT RMON OUT Forthe DCE DTE ifName of the interface calculated value 1 RMON Virtual These values are 65 512 Interfaces calculated based on 9820 and the probe s internal 9820 2M circuit index circuit 65 Ma Ep 100000000 9820 8M and 9820 45M RMON Virtual These values are IN VIRTUAL PVC 513 1023 Logical calculated interface number Interfaces For the DTE DLCI number DT
175. ib 2 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Traps linkUp and linkDown Traps enterprise Specific Traps RMON Specific RMON Alarm and Event Defaults Network Synchronous Port Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLCI Alarm Defaults Object ID Cross References Numeric Order June 2000 B 1 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Support The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager and accessed by external SNMP managers using the SNMP protocol The following MIBs are supported MIB II RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 m Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 2115 m RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 m Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 Enterprise MIB RMON Version 1 MIB RFC 1757 RMON Version 2 MIB RFC 2021 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World Wide Web site gt Procedure To access Paradyne MIBs 1 Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com 2 Select Technical Support 3 Select Management Information Base MIBs The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS application soft
176. ified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured packet and the DLCI number for the packet m The type of information contained in the captured packet either Sequence Number Exchange or Full Status Report m The send and receive rcv sequence numbers from the captured packet 0 255 m On the Packets Received side of the screen PVC status for up to ten DLCls can be shown It shows the DLCI number its active bit status and if Standard LMI is running the DLCs CIR value 8 6 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Alarms 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 1 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Clock Out of Range at Network A valid port rate cannot be detected because the Unit is auto rating on the network data port trying to detect a valid port rate Rate detected is greater than the highest port rate supported by the unit FrameSaver SLV 9820 rates 64 or 128 kbps FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M rates 64 2048 kbps in 64 kbps increments FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M rates 1024 8192 kbps in 8 kbps increments FrameSaver SLV
177. ignal Element 113 24 A To DCE U A Terminal Timing TT 11 B W B DTE Source C 12 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments EIA 530 A Straight through Cable Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M A standard straight through cable Feature No 9008 F 1 523 is used to connect the network data port to the NTU or the user data port to a DTE when the Port Type is E530 EIA 530 A It is a 25 pin EIA 530A to 25 pin EIA 530 A DB25 to DB25 cable 99 16304 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 C 13 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments The following table provides the pin assignments for the DB25 to DB25 straight through cable 25 Pin 25 Pin Plug Socket Signal ITU Pin Direction Pin Shield 1 1 Transmit Data TXD 103 2 A To DCE 2 A 14 B 14 B Received Data RXD 104 3 A From DCE 3 A 16 B 16 B Request to Send RTS 105 4 19 To DCE 4 19 Clear to Send CTS 106 5 13 From DCE 5 13 Data Set or DCE Ready DSR 107 6 From DCE 6 Data Terminal or DTE Ready 108 1 2 20 To DCE 20 DTR Signal Ground Common SG 102 7 7 Data Channel Received Line 109 8 10 From DCE 8 10 Signal Detector RLSD or LSD Transmit Signal Element Timing 114 15 A From DCE 15 A TXC DCE Source 12 B 12 B Received Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE 17 A RXC DCE Source 9 B 9 B Local Loopback LL 141 18
178. ill be required 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 8 21 Troubleshooting B gt Procedure 2 To ping the NMS at the central site 1 Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 2 Verify that the central site NMS s router has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 3 Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap Manager if the router is to route data so a route has been configured within the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps Or for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP Default IP Destination Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC Multiplexing is used as when using the Auto Configuration feature 4 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test gt IP Ping 5 Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS then select Start 6 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any
179. ined for troubleshooting by the service provider None A troubleshooting DLCI is not defined DLCI A troubleshooting DLCI is defined Its value must be entered in the next field TS Access DLCl Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting blank Specifies the DLCI on the network interface to be used for troubleshooting by the service provider 16 1007 Specifies the DLCI Create a Dedicated Network Management Link With the cursor on the Create a Dedicated Network Management Link field press Enter When prompted enter a DLCI for the link from 16 to 1007 The management link DLCI is added or modified June 2000 4 3 Configuration Options Table 4 1 Easy Install Configuration Options 2 of 2 Ethernet Port Options Screen With the cursor on the Ethernet Port Options Screen field press Enter The Ethernet Port Options screen appears See Configuring the Ethernet Port on page 4 50 After configuring the Ethernet port configuration options save your changes Then press ESC to return to the Easy Install screen Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the unit its location and a contact for the unit as well as to set the system clock Main Menu gt Control gt System Information The following information is available for viewing Save any entries or changes
180. ion number appears the file transfer is complete If In Progress appears the file is still being transferred m f Invalid appears no download has occurred or the download was not successful Changing Software Once a software upgrade is downloaded it needs to be activated When activated the unit resets then executes the downloaded software With this feature you control when the upgrade software is implemented B gt Procedure To switch to the new software 1 Go to the Control menu and select Select Software Release Main Menu Control gt Select Software Release The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just transferred are shown If the download failed Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field instead of the new release number Repeat the procedure in Upgrading System Software if this occurs 2 Select Switch amp Reset 3 Enter Yes to the Are you sure prompt The unit resets and begins installing the newly transferred software 4 Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current Software Revision Main Menu gt Status gt Identity NOTE If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit s Identity screen while the unit is downloading software the In Progress message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field See Displaying System Information in Chapter 6 Monitoring to see what is included on the unit s Identity
181. ional information about installing accessing and managing FrameSaver SLV devices through Concord s Network Health and for information about applicable reports refer to Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay reports Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand and use Traffic Accountant reports Installation and Setup of Network Health Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions and follow the instructions applicable to your network platform Once Network Health is installed you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions called a module Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those features and functions Make sure you license the Poller application so you can poll SLV units and collect data To use this application 1 Discover network elements units and interfaces in the network 2 Configure the Network Health applications then save them 3 Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes 4 Set up and run reports Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural
182. is reenabled and its control leads are reasserted The LMI state on Port 1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network interface That is Port 1 s LMI follows the network interface s LMI This setting is useful if the router connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down or LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other interface That is the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other Use this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit It is not recommended since it makes fault isolation more difficult Traffic Policing Possible Settings Disable Enable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the Committed Information Rate CIR and Excess Information Rate EIR are enforced for frames sent to the network frame relay link Display Conditions This option appears only for Model 9820 45M Disable CIR and EIR are not enforced Enable CIR and EIR are enforced 4 14 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 2 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 2 LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the n
183. it the unit s CIR from Network Health Additional information that can be edited as well See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information gt Procedure To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health 1 Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog box once the discovery process is completed The Poller Configuration window opens Double click on the first element discovered The Modify Element dialog box opens In the Speed box select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the unit in the text box Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts e g enter 56 k for 56 kilobits per second or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second Apply your changes Select the Apply Next button to save your change and bring up the next element to be edited Continue until all newly discovered frame relay elements have been modified before selecting the OK button Select the the OK button The Modify Element dialog box closes Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window The modified elements are saved to the database and the units are polled Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for data to be gathered before running any reports June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Grouping Elements for Reports 9820 A2 GB20 20 Once the
184. ited number of protocols and advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are desired OSI Layers Monitored Using 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 9820 45M FrameSaver SLV 1 3 1 3 1 2 1 2 Netscout Probe 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 Hardware Bypass Feature In the event of catastrophic system failure or power loss data traffic is routed through hardware directly between the network port and the user data port June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 User Interface and Basic Operation This chapter tells you how to access use and navigate the menu driven user interface It includes the following Logging On Main Menu m Screen Work Areas Navigating the Screens Keyboard Keys Function Keys Selecting from a Menu Switching Between Screen Areas Selecting a Field Entering Information What appears on the screens depends on Current configuration How your network is currently configured Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user Data selection criteria What you entered in previous screens 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 2 1 User Interface and Basic Operation Logging On 2 2 Start a session using one of the following methods m Telnet session via An in band management channel through the frame relay network A local in band management channel configured on the DTE port between the FrameSaver unit and the router m
185. k Data Port Data rates Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 25 position DB25 subminiature connector Selectable EIA 530 V 35 X 21 Model 9820 45M HSSI EIA 613 Model 9820 56 64 kbps and 112 128 kbps auto detected Model 9820 2M 56 2048 kbps in 56 64 kbps increments auto detected Model 9820 8M 1024 8192 kbps in 8 kbps increments auto detected Model 9820 45M 0 44 21 kbps in 8 kbps increments auto detected User Data Port Data rates Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 25 position DB25 subminiature connector Selectable EIA 530 A V 35 X 21 Model 9820 45M HSSI EIA 613 Automatically set to same values as the Network interface June 2000 D 3 Technical Specifications D 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Equipment List Equipment 9820 A2 GB20 20 See page E 3 for cables you can order Description Model Feature Number FrameSaver SLV In Line Units FrameSaver SLV 9820 In Line unit 128 Kbps for up to 16 PVCs Includes Standalone Housing Universal 100 240 VAC Power Supply Power Cord Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9820 A2 443 nnn FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M In Line unit 2 Mbps for up to 120 PVCs Includes Standalone Housing Universal 100 240 VAC Power Supply Power Cord Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9820 A2 444 nnn FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M In Line unit 8 Mbps for up to 250 PVCs Includes Standalone H
186. key Example To save a configuration option change select Save S or s is the designated function key If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections press the spacebar the first valid setting for the field appears Continue pressing the spacebar to scroll through other possible settings June 2000 2 9 User Interface and Basic Operation 2 10 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Procedures 9820 A2 GB20 20 This chapter includes the following Basic Configuration Configuration Option Areas Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options Saving Configuration Options Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units June 2000 3 1 Configuration Procedures Basic Configuration Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates Use the FrameSaver unit s Configuration Edit Display menu to display or change configuration option settings The Configuration Edit Display menu of a FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M is shown below Configuration Menu main config 9820 2M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 23 32 CONFIGURATION EDIT DISPLAY System Network Data Ports Pvc Connections Management and Communication Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Changing an Auto Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit s configuration See Setting Up Auto Configuration f
187. l modified by the customer June 2000 3 3 Configuration Procedures Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 3 4 To access and display configuration options load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area B gt Procedure To load a set of configuration options for editing 1 From the Main Menu press the down arrow key so the cursor is on Configuration Press Enter to display the Configuration menu The Load Configuration From menu appears NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time Allow a minute or more for the file to be loaded Select the configuration option area from which you want to load configuration options and press Enter Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 or Default Factory Configuration The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display menu appears This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Procedures Changing Configuration Options 9820 A2 GB20 20 B gt Procedure To change configuration option settings From the Configuration Edit Display menu select a set of configuration options and press Enter For example Configuration PVC Connections Select th
188. lay the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface A text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this unit s management PVC Set DE Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible DE bit set This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during periods of network congestion This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower priority than customer data Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC This is the recommended setting particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service Primary Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port 1 Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Net1 FR1 Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection Port 1 Specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the connection Clear Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLC was multip
189. le see Table 4 10 Node IP Options Modem Model 9820 45M Uses the Modem port This selection is only available when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 19 Modem Port Options Ethernet Model 9820 45M Uses the Ethernet port This selection only appears when the Ethernet port is enabled see Table 4 16 Ethernet Port Options COM Uses the COM Terminal port This selection is only available when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 17 Communication Port Options PVCname Uses the defined management linkname the name given the Management PVC This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Disable Does not send trap messages for these events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events only AuthFail Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Disable Model 9820 45M Enable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable
190. le 4 6 User Data Port Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Auto Enable Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data TD Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M Auto The port checks the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC If necessary the port automatically phase inverts the clock with respect to the transmitted data Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock Monitor DTR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready DTR circuit on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When the DTR off condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Display Conditions This option does not appear when Port Type is set to X 21 the signal is assumed to be asserted Enable Interchange circuit CD ITU 108 1 2 DTR is monitored to determine when valid data is sent from
191. le LEDs Model 9820 45M m Device Messages Status Information m System and Test Status Messages which includes Self Test Results Messages Health and Status Messages Test Status Messages m Network LMI Reported DLCls Status PVC Connection Status m Network Interface Status P Routing Table Model 9820 45M Performance Statistics Clearing Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Performance Statistics Frame Relay Performance Statistics Ethernet Performance Statistics Model 9820 45M Trap Event Log Model 9820 45M 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 1 Monitoring Displaying System Information Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver unit This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades Main Menu gt Status gt Identity View this field To find the System Name Domain name for this SNMP managed node up to 255 ASCII characters System Contact Contact person for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location for this SNMP managed node NAM NAM Type Type of unit installed referred to as a network access module or NAM i e DP FR NAM This card type is supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object Serial Number Unit s 7 character serial number Ethernet MAC Address 9820 45M Medi
192. lexed June 2000 4 37 Configuration Options Table 4 11 Management PVC Options 3 of 4 Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive Primary EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected EDLCls identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI fiel
193. ll automatically If the call cannot be completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable the SNMP trap message is held queued until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M Enable Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Directory Number A Alarm Disable Automatic calls will not be initiated Traps sent to the modem are held until a dial in connection is established Trap Disconnect Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the COM port connected modem disconnects after the SNMP trap message has been sent This configuration option only applies to modem connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M Enable Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message s Disable Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the remote modem This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for more information after receiving an SNMP trap Call Retry Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable If an alternate dial out directory is specified see Alternate Dial Out Directory the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed then
194. lly Rising is selected 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add this alarm 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCls Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 10 12 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Creating History Files 9820 A2 GB20 20 Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for each interface An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored Additional user history tables are created using the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs Object IDs to be monitored into the unit OpenLane provides several useful examples including three files containing a complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored one for a DLCI one for a frame relay link and one containing system type OIDs Any of these files can be used as a template when creating customized history files specific to the FrameSaver unit These files have a pdn udh user defined history format and are found in the OpenLane netscout userHistory directory The userHistory files should be moved to SNSHOME usr so they can be used A separate udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI o
195. lnet ACCESS sirirsirtirrerirsicrre tti eee eee es 5 5 Limiting FTP ACCESS srmrcsoiecsceiisri unitaire t EAn eaaa 5 6 Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link 5 7 Controlling SNMP ACCESS 00 0c eects 5 8 Disabling SNMP ACCESS oore cereal cadadbedadesdandedaa encamped 5 8 Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 5 9 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 5 10 Creating a LOgIN 2cci cs ceweeteadateegadts yee a unae aaa 5 11 Modiymg a LOJI ac cascceatwa cg cde hatwe and icatwadaapiacemagaes 5 12 DElSUnG LOGI 45 caqbirka Sanaardauhis ika ara baka nA 5 12 Displaying System Information 00 0c cece eee ees 6 2 Front Panel LEDS sisapridi sda detent a aera Stele Sua oes 6 3 Front Panel status LEDS scccungnctbiswreiietebeeriieetebceiia 6 4 Displaying LEDs and Control Leads 000 cece cece eee 6 6 Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen Models 9820 9820 2M COU OM cee dcednedsiaee a 6 6 Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen Model 9820 45M 6 8 Power Module LEDs Model 9820 45M 222000ceeeeeeeee 6 10 Device Massages csccrcieeenretreieeenretetrsterreteerecneredrs 6 11 Status Informati n grosserer de edetae ede ee tae Renewed 6 16 System and Test Status Messages 0 0 cee eeee eee eee 6 17 Network LMIl Reported DLCls Status 0000 eee 6 21 PVC Connection Status oce doe iina nona skrbe pinha bach bkadele ds 6 23 Network Int
196. loads can be stored and implemented at the user s discretion OpenLane Service Level Management Solution Provides an advanced standards based performance monitoring and management application Being standards based the OpenLane SLM system can also be used with other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM s NetView OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane features with the OpenView Web interface Being Web based the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data contained in the database to provide anytime anywhere access to this information via a Web browser Some of the OpenLane SLM system s features include Real time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement details not averages which can skew performance results of service level agreement SLA parameters Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical reports so frame relay SLAs can be verified Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy to use tool for performing tests which include end to end PVC loopback connectivity and physical interface tests Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices and set RMON alarms and thresholds Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be assigned Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered automatically along with their PVCs
197. ls are included DLCls not included in three consecutive LMI full status response messages LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and they revert to their default settings A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is down or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link Disable Unused network DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs must be manually removed June 2000 4 9 Configuration Options Setting Up Management FrameSaver units are already set up for SNMP management with Community Name 1 set to Public and Name 1 Access set to Read Write For remote sites other than the IP Address this is all that is required Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management See Table 4 12 General SNMP Management Options for configuration information For the central site local management between the unit and the router must be set up as well see Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site Set up a local management PVC between the central site unit and its router for local management control by the end user customer B gt Procedure To set up management through the router 1 Create a DLCI that will be used for management on the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records 2 Cre
198. m History samples seconds 5 Long Term History samples seconds 4 Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following Property Description Setting Groups Stats S Statistics collection Enabled for all domains Hosts H Level 3 information Enabled for IP domain only network Disabled for all other domains Conversations C Protocols being used Disabled for all domains Logging Event logging Disabled for all domains and groups 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply the changes Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 10 7 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be configured and assigned to each DLCI OpenLane provides a template for configuring alarms DLCI alarms can be configured manually but using the Paradyne alarm defaults template greatly reduces configuration time The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB Frames Sent SLVFramesSnt Rx DLC Utilization SLVrxDLCIUtil Tx CIR Utilization SLVTxCIRUtil Frames Sent Above CIR SLVFramesTxAbvCIR Tx DLCI Utilization SLVTxDLCIUtil Average Latency AverageLatency Frames Rec
199. m SLM Overview 00 00 c cee ce eee eee m FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitor Features 2 User Interface and Basic Operation Keyb0ald KGySiasctniacconvesbanecepretetieeneyes FUNCION KGYS ccc1 ccarregenrieeenngernmre end sas Selecting froma Menu 00000e eee eee Switching Between Screen Areas 0055 Selecting a Field 0 00 cc cece eee ee eee Entering IMCMnmalion cc aicceedecieriten dessadeddns 3 Configuration Procedures E Basic Configuration cc iccccstesnbeneniaresdapesse abs Configuration Option Areas 00 00 ee eee Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options Saving Configuration Options 000 Minimal Configuration Before Deploying Remote Units 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 Purpose and Intended Audience 0005 Document Organization 00 cece eee eee eee Product Related Documents 0 00 ee eee Gonventions Used c iscuciicedceaeydidasdtbindidbtas LOGIN OM mere eer eet a erence it rien carer tea crate ee ee eer Mai MERU s cecid Saciateeaatecditee 2a ENEA R Screen Work Areas vca3c5 catuae anastasia eaadinsed darnaewe Navigating ihe SCheGNS 0 d2 chccidngiediadicagiaans Contents 4 ii Configuration Options Configuring Using the Easy Install Screen Model 9820 45M 4 3 Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock 4 4 Setti
200. mit bandwidth for FTP Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M FTP Max Receive Rate to a rate less than the network line speed typically less than or equal to the CIR This method is not recommended if SLV reports are desired since FTP is required to generate the reports 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about setting FTP configuration options June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link B gt Procedure To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Disable Telnet Session and or FTP Session as appropriate 3 Return to the Management and Communication menu and select Node IP 4 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable access via a TS Management Link TS Management Link to None Assign an access level to the TS Management Link TS Management Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level
201. moval MAIN MENU Status Test Control Configuration Auto Configuration Menu Hierarchy Easy Install System Information Device Name System Name Location Contact Date Time 9820 45M Administer Logins Login ID Password Access Level New i Easy Install e Node IP Address e Node Subnet Mask e TS Access Create Management Link Ethernet Port Options 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 9820 A2 GB20 20 Select Software Release Current Release Alternate Release Switch amp Reset June 2000 Easy Install MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Easy Install Modem Call Directories System Information Administer Logins Change Operating Mode Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility Disconnect Modem Reset Device LMI Packet Capture Utility e Capture Interface Packet Capture Start Stop Status Packets in Buffer Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control 00 16786b A 3 Menu Hierarchy A 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults 9820 A2 GB20 20 This appendix contains the following MIB Support Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps System Group mib 2 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectlD system 2 Interfaces Group m
202. munication in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting June 2000 5 3 Security and Logins Controlling External COM Port Device Access Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Dial in access can be controlled on Models 9820 9820 2M and 9820 8M when an external device modem is connected to the unit s communication COM port The External Device Commands option must be set to AT or Other B gt Procedure To control dial in access 1 Select the External Modem options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt External Modem Com Port 2 Enable or disable the Dial In Access configuration option This option only appears when the External Device Commands option is set to AT or Other 3 Save your change See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about external device communication port configuration options Controlling Modem Port Device Access Model 9820 45M Dial in access through the Modem port can be controlled on the Model 9820 45M B gt Procedure To control dial in access 1 Select the Modem Port Options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port 2 Enable or disable the Dial In Access configuration option 3 Save your change See Configuring the Modem Port in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for more information about Modem port configuration options 5 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20
203. n at an FTP terminal A file transfer was performed successfully Switch to the newly downloaded software See Changing Software in Chapter 7 FTP Operation 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 11 Monitoring 6 12 Table 6 9 Device Messages 2 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do File Transfer Failed Invalid file Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was attempted but it was not successful Try again making sure you type the filename correctly Exit the FTP session or download another file See Changing Software in Chapter 7 FTP Operation Invalid Character x An invalid character was entered Reenter information using valid printable ASCII characters Invalid date must be mm dd yyyy A non valid date was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format Invalid time must be hh mm ss A non valid system time was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the time in the hour minutes seconds format Invalid Was Already Active A test was already in progress when it was selected No action needed Invalid Password Login is required and an incorrect password was entered access is denied Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password Invalid Test Combination A conflicting loopback or pattern test was in pr
204. n internal failure occurred XXXXXXXX represents an 8 digit hexadecimal failure code used by service personnel Record the failure code before resetting the unit otherwise the error information will be lost 1 Record the failure code 2 Reset the unit 3 Contact your service representative Last Reset Model 9820 45M Date and time the unit was powered on or reset No action needed Passed No problems were found during power on or reset No action needed June 2000 6 17 Monitoring 6 18 Health and Status Messages The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the FrameSaver unit Table 6 11 Health and Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates Auto Configuration Active Auto Configuration feature is active which allows automatic configuration and cross connection of DLCls as they are reported by the network LMI Back to Back Mode Active The operating mode has been configured for back to back operation Main Menu gt Control gt Change Operating Mode The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them This feature is useful for product demonstrations or for a point to point configuration using a leased line Backup Active Model 9820 45M A backup has been established and data is flowing over an alternate DLCI Clock Out of Range at Network 1
205. n provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI errors are detected Using this utility any enabled frame relay link on the user data port or network interface can be selected The utility captures any LMI packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called Imitrace syc in the system s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information See Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface for additional information on this feature B gt Procedure To use this utility 1 Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu gt Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility 2 Select an enabled frame relay link or Capture Interface either Net1 FR1 or Port 1 3 Start packet capture While capturing data the status is Active Packets in Buffer indicates the number of packets that have been captured Up to 8000 packets can be held When the buffer is full the oldest packets will be overwritten 4 To stop the utility press Enter The field toggles back to Start 5 Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for debugging decoding See Transferring Collected Data in Chapter 7 FTP Operations for additional information about this feature 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 8 5 Troubleshooting Viewing Capture
206. nches The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears when security has been set up main Access Level 1 9820 45M Device Name Node A 05 13 2000 02 01 Slot 1 Type T1 FR NAM MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Model 9820 45M only Ctrl a to access these functions Select To Status View diagnostic tests interfaces PVC connections and statistics You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit identity information Test Select and cancel test for the FrameSaver unit s interfaces Configuration Display and edit the configuration options Auto Configuration Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a selected application You can automatically populate network and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric settings Control Control the asynchronous user interface for call directories device naming login administration and selecting software releases You can also initiate a power on reset of the FrameSaver unit See Appendix A Menu Hierarchy for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit s menus and screens 2 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 User Interface and Basic Operation Screen Work Areas There are two user work areas Screen area Where you input information into fields Function keys area Where you perform specific screen func
207. nd type y Yes at one of the prompts If selecting The following occurs Reset COM Terminal port Port Use is set to Terminal so the usage asynchronous terminal can be used Data Rate Kbps Character Length Stop Bits and Parity are reset to the factory defaults Unit resets itself Reload Factory Defaults All configuration and control settings are reset to the Default Factory Configuration overwriting the current configuration Unit resets itself CAUTION This causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a self test to be performed If no selection is made within 30 seconds or if No n is entered the unit resets itself and no configuration changes are made Once the unit resets itself connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 8 4 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Management Link Feature A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additional information about this feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature A packet capture utility has bee
208. ng Up for Trap Dial Out Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 4 5 Setting Up an External Modem for Trap Dial Out 4 5 Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out 4 5 Setting Up Auto Configuration 0 c cece eee 4 6 Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode 0005 4 7 Automatically Removing a Circuit 0 00 ccc eee eee 4 9 Setting Up Management seserreerrtneekiteirrpa hipoki e aes 4 10 Setting Up Local Management at the Central Site 4 10 Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 0 4 11 Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site 4 11 Setting Up Back to Back Operation asaan eee eee eee 4 12 Changing Operating Mode c cricgarciecricsatiieceacsebe tears 4 12 Coniiquration Option Tables 2 ccccsseercted vecierciodramars eaves 4 13 Configuring the Overall System 000060 c cece eee eee 4 13 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System 4 14 Configuring Service Level Verification Options 4 16 Configuring General System Options 000000 eee eae 4 18 Configuring the Physical Interfaces 00 0c cece eee eae 4 19 Configuring the Network Data Port 00 cece eee ee aee 4 19 Configuring the User Data Port 0 0 cece eee 4 21 Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface 0 eee eee 4 23 Manually Configuring DLCI Recor
209. nitiate a reset and power on self test of the unit B gt Procedure To reset the unit from the Control menu 1 2 From the Main Menu screen select Control Select Reset Device and press Enter The Are You Sure prompt appears Type y Yes and press Enter The unit reinitializes itself performing a self test Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Cycling the power resets the unit This is an emergency procedure that should be executed only if the Control menu is inaccessible and never be executed while the unit is in use 9820 A2 GB20 20 Models 9820 9820 2M and 9820 8M Disconnect then reconnect the power cord Model 9820 45M Switch off both power supplies then switch on both power supplies June 2000 8 3 Troubleshooting Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit Configuring the unit improperly can render the menu driven user interface inaccessible If this occurs connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected asynchronous terminal gt Procedure To reset COM Terminal port settings 1 Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set Flow Control to None 2 Reset the unit then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen appears See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication for other methods of resetting the unit 3 Tab to the desired prompt a
210. nk as a DLCI with DLCI Type set to Standard TS Management Link Access Level Available Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP session when the service provider is using the TS Management Link Display Conditions This option does not appear when TS Management Link is set to None NOTES Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the Session Access Level Login Required or FTP Login Required option settings see Table 4 13 Telnet and FTP Session Options Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings Level 1 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 4 35 Configuration Options Configuring Management PVCs 4 36 Sel
211. nnections DLC Records can also be created manually see Table 4 8 Main Menu Configuration Network Data Ports DLCI Records Typically DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit the unit automatically configures non management DLCI Records and PVC Connections Table 4 8 DLCI Record Options 1 of 3 DLCI Number Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from 0 to 1023 However the numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 are reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 If the DLCI number is part of a connection this field is read only NOTES If a DLCl number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed Default Setting Multiplexed Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is S
212. nnector straight through cable to V 35 DTE adapter C 11 network cable to X 21 adapter cable network cable EIR statistics elements DLCls 11 3 Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 38 4 39 ending a session enforcement of CIR and EIR Enter Return key entering system information enterprise specific traps enable disable 4 46 equipment list Error Event LMI 4 15 4 24 Errors frame relay statistics Esc key June 2000 IN 3 Index Ethernet statistics Ethernet port as default IP destination 4 34 MAC address user interface options even parity Event Log Traps exception points 11 7 Excess Burst Size Bits 4 28 External Device controlling access Modem on Com Port options 4 57 Commands 4 57 set up for trap dial out Transmit Clock F faceplate fan assembly cleaning 12 2 replacing 12 3 FDR 1 3 features field is blank empty file transfer file transfer protocol FTP configuration options Frame Delivery Ratio FDR 1 3 Frame Relay configuring interface configuring system 4 14 Discovery saving a mode change statistics troubleshooting PVC problems 8 13 frames 4 37 front panel assembly cleaning 12 2 LEDs replacing 12 3 FTP configuration options 4 43 file transfers initiating a session limiting access 5 5 5 6 Login Required Max Receiv
213. ns This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M for which the port type is HSSI E530 The port is an EIA 530 A compatible DCE An EIA 530 A compatible DTE can be directly connected to the DB25 connector V 35 The port is a V 35 compatible DCE A V 35 compatible DTE can be connected to the DB25 connector by using an adapter cable X 21 The port is a V 11 X 21 compatible DCE A V 11 X 21 compatible DTE can be connected to the DB25 connector by using an adapter cable Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE NOTE Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M or when Port Type is set to X 21 Internal The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming data External The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data and the FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 4 21 Configuration Options Tab
214. ntents 10 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices E Geng oaned oars hse cane aeniay iis MAA edad a dd AG AWS Seale 10 2 m Configuring NetScout Manager PIUS 5 ic tcrasceeretesrntesraccenanes 10 3 Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus INS VON tas te tical alah AEEA oe tient EEEE EE 10 4 Verifying Domains and Groups Models 9820 and 9820 2M 10 5 Correcting Domains and Groups Models 9820 and 9820 2M 10 6 Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template 000220e eae 10 8 Eding AAMS 63 23c6esiaedaaneeotase dead aesd bbadts ikoa 10 9 Adding SLY Alarms Manually 2 000 cee eeee eee eens 10 11 Greating History FIGS s22 cccrnterceppaersdetsregtnayeanepeaes 10 13 Installing the User Defined History Files 005 10 15 E Monitorning a DECIs History Data acccacviddarssdentudacs saveimaga 10 16 m Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Models 9820 and OO202M catcusiass dearer idds ss ease bwdbas AR EN 10 19 m Statistical Windows Supported Models 9820 and 9820 2M 10 20 11 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Installation and Setup of Network Health 00 0 00 e eens 11 2 Discovering FrameSaver Elements 02000ceeeeeeeeeeees 11 3 Configuring the Discovered Elements 00000ee eee eae 11 4 Grouping Elements for Reports 020e eee ee eee eee eee 11 5 Generating Reports fora Group 0020 e cenc
215. o help them determine optimum service levels needed based upon their own traffic data as well as provide documented evidence for increasing CIR It combines daily volume daily Health exceptions bandwidth distribution average Health Index ratings and availability for each DLCI onto a single page At a Glance Reports Provides consolidated DLCI and network performance information onto a single page At a Glance Report Consolidates bandwidth utilization network traffic events occurring over the reporting period and availability and latency levels information Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCI s poor Health Index rating FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report Performs trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls see page 11 9 for an example This is the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver SLV s unique monitoring capabilities using the unit s SLV enhanced network statistics 11 8 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Paradyne Frame Saver SLV Plus At a Glance Report WAN Elemen
216. oes not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is disconnected Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive 4 54 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 17 Communication Port Options 4 of 5 IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM Terminal port Only in effect when the COM Terminal port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM Terminal port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the COM Terminal port and fills the address with zeros For Models 9820 9820 2M and 9820 8M when the IP Address is all zeros the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when
217. of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size See Table B 16 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 B 27 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 16 Alarm OID Cross Reference 1 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Frames Sent MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Received MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 6 5 1 1 2 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_SyncPortStats mib E Tag devSyncPortStatsUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Exceeding CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devF
218. ogress when Start was selected to start another test or was active on the same or another interface when Start was selected Wait until other test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from IP addresses must be unique The address entered matches that of another NMS already defined Enter a different IP address Limit of six Login IDs reached An attempt to enter a new login ID was made and the limit of six login password combinations has been reached Delete another login password combination Reenter the new login ID Limit of Mgmt PVCs reached New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of management PVCs has already been created Do not create the management PVC Delete another management PVC and try again June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Table 6 9 Device Messages 3 of 5 Monitoring Message What It Indicates What To Do Limit of PVC Connections reached New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of PVCs has already been created Do not create the PVC connection Delete another PVC connection and try again Link Inactive You attempted to start a PVC test on an inactive link Activate the link or test a different link Name Must be Uni
219. ons 4 62 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Security and Logins 9820 A2 GB20 20 This chapter includes the following Limiting Access Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Controlling External COM Port Device Access Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Controlling Modem Port Device Access Model 9820 45M Controlling Telnet or FTP Access Limiting Telnet Access Limiting FTP Access Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link Controlling SNMP Access Disabling SNMP Access Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses Creating a Login Modifying a Login Deleting a Login June 2000 5 1 Security and Logins Limiting Access 5 2 The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces Asynchronous async terminal External devices Telnet FTP SNMP Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time that is you can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions or one Telnet session and one active asynchronous terminal session or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal sessions June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Security and Logins Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 9820 A2 GB20 20 Asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface can be limited by m Requiring a login m Assigning an access level to the port or interface B gt Procedure To limit asynchronous terminal acces
220. or network Configure LMI characteristics to match those of the DTE or network LMI link is inactive Verify that the LMI link is active on the network the Status Msg Received counter on the Network Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen increments Losing Data CIR and Excess Burst Size are inadequate for the throughput required Verify the configured Network PVC settings then increase the settings as needed or decrease throughput on the PVC Frame relay network is experiencing problems Run PVC Loopback and Pattern tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider Out of Sync message If Monitor Pattern was selected it means the test pattern generator and receiver have not yet synchronized CIR settings for the units at each end are mismatched If the message persists it means that 5 packets out of 25 are missing or are out of sequence Verify that the unit at the other end is configured to Send Pattern Correct unit configurations Correct the CIR setting so both units are configured the same Check the line s error rate the physical line quality Contact the service provider 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 8 13 Troubleshooting Tests Available The following tests are available to a FrameSaver SLV 9820 model Test Menu Example main test 9820 2M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 6 02 TEST Network PVC Tests Data Po
221. or additional information 3 2 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Procedures Configuration Option Areas 9820 A2 GB20 20 The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default Configuration option area You can find the default settings for configuration options in the m FrameSaver SLV Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M and 9820 45M Quick Reference Configuration Option Tables If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application Four configuration option storage areas are available Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The currently active set of configuration options Customer Configuration 1 An alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Customer Configuration 2 Another alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default set of configuration options You can load and edit default factory configuration settings but you can only save those changes to the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration option areas The Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas are identical to the Default Factory Configuration unti
222. or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Alternate Destination DLCI has no value if Alternate Destination Link contains no value Display Conditions This option appears only for Model 9820 45M 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number Alternate Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLC for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option appears only for Model 9820 45M only when the Alternate Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLC record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number June 2000 4 31 Configuration Options Setting Up Management and Communication Options The following options can be selected from the Management and Communication menu Node IP Options Management PVC Options General SNMP Management Options Telnet and FTP Sessions Options m SNMP NMS Security Options SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options m Ethernet Port Options Model 9820 45M Communication Port Options m External Modem COM Port Options Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Modem Port Options Model 9820 45M Configuring Node IP Information Select Node IP to display add or change the information nec
223. ord referred to as the login are required to access the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If required the login used is the same login used for an menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Management Link Enable Requires a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login June 2000 4 41 Configuration Options Table 4 13 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 3 Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If a login is required for the session the effective access level is also determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option This option does not affect the TS Management Link NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the session or the user For example if the assigned Session Access Level is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access is allowed for the session Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed CAUTION Before changing the session access level to Level 2 or 3 m
224. other message is displayed additional testing will be required Lamp Test The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1 2 second during execution of the test When the test is stopped the LEDs are restored to their normal condition Main Menu gt Test gt Lamp Test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires See Test Timeout Feature for additional information 8 22 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes OQOpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 9820 A2 GB20 20 Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM system supports all FrameSaver and FrameSaver SLV devices with the following features m Web and database services m Web access to health and status information Web access to real time as well as historical graphs and reports m Web access to SLV reports On demand polling of FrameSaver devices m Web based diagnostic tests end to end PVC loopbacks connectivity and physical interface tests m Basic device configuration Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery of SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option
225. ou respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt Table 4 9 PVC Connection Options 1 of 3 Source Link Possible Settings Port 1 NET1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 1 has no DLCls defined Port 1 would not appear as a valid setting Port 1 Specifies the user data port as the source link Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface or network data port as the source link Clear All Clears all Link and DLCI settings and suppresses EDLCIls Source DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a
226. oughout the screens They are not case sensitive so upper or lowercase letters can be used interchangeably These keys use the following conventions For the screen Select function And press Enter to Morm MainMenu Return to the Main Menu screen Eore Exit Terminate the asynchronous terminal session Norn New Enter new data Ooro Modify Modify existing data Lorl Delete Delete data Sors Save Save information Rorr Refresh Update screen with current information Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the screen Variations include ClrSLV amp DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI statistics ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics Uoru PgUp Display the previous page Dord PgDn Display the next page June 2000 2 7 2 8 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting from a Menu B gt Procedure To select from a menu 1 Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Enter The selected menu or screen appears gt Procedure To return to a previous screen press the Escape Esc key until you reach the desired screen Switching Between Screen Areas Use Cirl a to switch between screen areas p gt Procedu
227. ousing Universal 100 240 VAC Power Supply Power Cord Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9820 A2 445 nnn FrameSaver SLV 9820 45M In Line unit 45 Mbps for up to 512 PVCs Includes Rack Mount Housing Redundant Power Supplies Power Cords Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9820 A2 429 User Manual FrameSaver SLV Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M and 9820 45M User s Guide Paper Manual 9820 A2 GB20 1 Model number may include the country code nnn Contact your Paradyne sales office June 2000 E 1 Equipment List E 2 Model Feature Description Number Power Supply 100 240 VAC Power Supply Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M 9001 F1 040 120 VAC Power Module Model 9820 45M 9580 F 1 020 NMS Products OpenLane Enterprise 7805 D1 001 OpenLane Workgroup 7805 D 1 003 NetScout Manager Plus For UNIX or Windows NT 9180 NetScout Server For UNIX or Windows NT 9190 NetScout WebCast For UNIX or Windows NT 9155 Optional Features Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 891 Shelf Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housings 9001 F 1 894 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Cables 9820 A2 GB20 20 This table lists cables you can order Equipment List to MS34 connector HSSI to V 35 adapter cable 1 ft 0 3 m Description Part Number Feature Number LAN Adapter 002 0069 0031 310
228. pears No is the default for this prompt If Yes is entered all multiplexed DLCls and PVC Connections are deleted except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and the Management PVC that is designated as TS Management Link If No is entered previously discovered and auto configured option settings will not be removed but configuration updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the just saved mode setting If No n is entered or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt no Auto Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting Automatically Removing a Circuit 9820 A2 GB20 20 Using the automatic circuit removal feature which comes enabled network DLCls and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit s configuration when the the network service provider no longer supports them Automatic deletion is based upon information from a LMI full status response on an active frame relay link When this feature is set to Enable The following will be automatically removed from the unit s configuration Unsupported network DLCls and PVC connections that include multiplexed network DLCls Unsupported standard network DLCls that are not configured as the primary destination in a management PVC Non management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLC
229. pendix C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments for cable pin assignments Table 4 18 External Modem COM Port Options 1 of 2 External Modem Commands Possible Settings Disable AT Default Setting Disable Specifies the type of commands to be sent over the COM port Disable Commands will not be sent over the COM port AT Standard Attention AT Commands are sent over the COM port to control the external device All AT command strings will end with a carriage return hex Ox0D anda line feed hex 0x0A CAUTION Do not use this setting if you have an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the FrameSaver unit through the COM port based on the Port Use option setting Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is disabled Enable Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or IP network Disable Does not answer incoming calls June 2000 4 57 Configuration Options Table 4 18 External Modem COM Port Options 2 of 2 Alternate IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the Alternate IP Address for the COM port when the alternate phone directory is used If this configuration option i
230. period in minutes inclusive Power Up Selftest Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether a self test runs when the unit is powered on Disabling the self test reduces the time it takes for the unit to become operational Display Conditions This option only appears for Model 9820 45M Enable The power on self test runs Disable The power on self test does not run 4 18 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring the Physical Interfaces Characteristics for the following physical interfaces can be configured Network Data Port Physical Interface Options m User Data Port Physical Interface Options Configuring the Network Data Port 9820 A2 GB20 20 Select Physical to display or change the physical configuration options for the port being used as the network interface see Table 4 5 Main Menu gt Configuration Network Physical The network data port physical interface acts as a DTE The network interface automatically detects the rate offered by the external NTU CSU DSU or inverse multiplexer Table 4 5 Network Data Port Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Port Type Possible Settings E530 V 35 X 21 Default Setting V 35 Selects the type of port to be used for the network data port Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M for which the port type is HSSI E530 The por
231. press Enter Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been stopped NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE initiated loopbacks June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 PVC Tests 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface m When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices they are nondisruptive to data so user data can continue to be sent during a test m f the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device PVC tests are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data Also the Connectivity test would not appear Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit the other end can send and monitor pattern tests The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with the multiplexed DLCI 550 selected If a standard DLCI was selected Disruptive rather than Non Disruptive would be displayed after Test Also the Connectivity test would not appear PVC Tests Screen Example main test network_pvc 9820 2M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 6 03 NETWORK PVC TESTS DLCI Number 550 Test Non Disruptive Command Status Result PVC Loopback Start Inactive 0 00 00 Send Pattern Start Inactive 0 00 00 Monitor Pattern Start Inactive 0 00 00 Se
232. ptions COM Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM Terminal port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 17 Communication Port Options PVCname Specifies a name for the management PVC Only appears when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in the London office London can be specified as the PVC name which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in London London would appear as one of the available selections 4 34 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 10 Node IP Options 3 of 3 TS Management Link Available Settings None PVCname Default Setting None Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service providers If the option is changed from the management PVC name to None the Delete the Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select No The link designation is removed and the option is set to None Yes The link designation is removed and the option is set to None and the link and its DLCI will be deleted None Disables or does not specify a TS Management Link PVCname Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC Display Conditions This selection only appears when a dedicated Management PVC has been defined on the network frame relay li
233. que Name entered for a management PVC has been used previously Enter another 4 character name for the logical management link No circuits available for Mgmt PVC New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all configured DLCls have been connected Configure more network and or Port 1 DLCls and try again No DLCls available for connection New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but all configured DLCls have been connected No action needed Configure more DLCls and try again New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all Link DLCI pairs have been connected Configure more network and or Port 1 Links DLCls pairs and try again No DLCls Defined DLCI Records was selected from an interface s Configuration Edit Display menu and no DLCI Records have been created for this interface Select New and create a DLCI record No more DLCls allowed New or CopyFrom was selected from an interface s DLCI Records configuration screen and the maximum number of DLC Records had already been reached Delete a DLCI then create the new DLCI record No more PVCs allowed CreatePVC was selected on the DLCI Records configuration screen and the maximum numbers of PVCs for the device has already been created Delete a PVC then create the new PVC No Security Records to Delete Delete was selected from the Administer Lo
234. quence Errors 99999 Data Errors 99999 Connectivity Inactive RndTrip Time ms 99999 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit NOTE Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in the two FrameSaver devices If errors are detected verify the CIR configuration and retest June 2000 8 17 Troubleshooting Network or Port Internal PVC Loopback The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis This test logically not physically loops back frames received from another FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device Main Menu gt Test Network PVC Tests PVC Loopback Network PVC Loopback DTE gt _ 4 _ PVC x eee a Lee gt Network PVC x 98 16186 Main Menu gt Test gt Data Port PVC Tests PVC Loopback Port PVC Loopback Network 98 16187 Send Pattern This test sends frames filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface on a per DLCI basis To send a pattern test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests gt Send Pattern If the selected And the default DLCI is configured as Then Rate kbps setting is Standard Disruptive appears 100 of CIR after Test Multiplexed Non Disruptive 10 of CIR appears after Test
235. r Guide 2930 620 NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide 2930 788 NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide Concord Communications Documentation 09 10010 005 Network Health User Guide 09 10020 005 Network Health Installation Guide 09 10050 002 Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide 09 10070 001 Network Health Reports Guide Contact your sales or service representative to order product documentation Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at www paradyne com Select Library Technical Manuals To order a paper copy of this manual m Within the U S A call 1 800 PARADYNE 1 800 727 2396 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 8623 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 xi About This Guide Conventions Used Convention Used Italic Menu selection sequence Path Brackets Text highlighted in red xii June 2000 When Used To indicate variable information e g DLCI nnnn To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step For example Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status indicates that you should select Status from the Main Menu then select System and Test Status To provide a check point that coincides with the menu path shown at the top of the screen Always shown within parentheses so you can verify that you are
236. r Plus for FrameSaver Devices Correcting Domains and Groups Models 9820 and 9820 2M Properties need to be edited when not using the Paradyne provided file and when Anunsupported domain needs to be deleted A missing domain needs to be added Groups Samples Interval and Logging are not configured as specified in Step 3 of Verifying Domains and Groups B gt Procedure 1 Select the the Property button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window The Property Editor window opens Property Editor Shared Type FrameRelay Samples Interval Logging Tomain Groups SH SH LH Stat Host Conv Add Edit Delete oso co 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sample Variable Type Rising Falling Add Edit Delete 2 To delete an unsupported domain click on the domain from the Domains list then select the Delete button The Are you sure prompt appears Select Yes The unsupported domain disappears from the list 10 6 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 3 To add a FrameSaver SLV supported domain or correct property settings select the Edit button to the right of the Domain section of the Property Editor window The Edit Domain window opens Edit Domain Domains Logging DLCLPart List Stats Enable Disable Hosts Enable 4 Disable Conversations Disable Disable Short Ter
237. r link that will be monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded Use a text editor to create these udh files by Copying one of the interface specific files DLCI or link and editing it using one of the examples provided as a guide Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the FrameSaver unit CAUTION Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the unit UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 These files must not be modified These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCls before starting to be sure your agent and DLCI lists are current To rediscover agents and their DLCls select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected June 2000 10 13 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices B gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Copy an example or interface specific file to a new file that contains the user history table number 3 Open the new file using a text editor The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs Object IDs The frame relay interface number 101016002 must replace IFN and the DLC number to be monitored must replace DLCI Example frCircuitSentFrames Change 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 IFN DLCI to 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 101016002 301 The onl
238. r the control lead alarms are generated as shown in Table B 7 String ifString alarmString down e g Sync Data Port SO1P2 DTR and RTS down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the port If the interface is configured to monitor the control lead alarms are generated as shown in Table B 7 String ifString up linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port If the interface is configured to monitor the control lead alarms are generated as shown in Table B 7 String ifString alarmString down e g Sync Data Port SO1P1 DTR down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the port If the interface is configured to monitor the control lead alarms are generated as shown in Table B 7 String ifString up June 2000 B 9 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 10 Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 2 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer continued Ethernet Port m iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown Communications are not possible on the port String Ethernet alarmString down linkUp Communication
239. rExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Network MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag frFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciStsCongestedSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg B 28 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 16 Alarm OID Cross Reference 2 of 2 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Current Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N Frame Size Upper Limits MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 N Frame Size Count 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Rx Short Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9
240. ral site and remote sites User data PVCs provide LAN to LAN connectivity between the central site and the remote sites Network Operations Center For NOC Management Corporate Headquarters E Frame Inverse Relay vines Router H L For Local Saab A FrameSaver Management Unit DLCI EDLCIs 100 0 User Data for Branch Office A 200 0 User Data for Branch Office B 100 2 Management Data for Branch Office A 200 2 Management Data for Branch Office B Multiplexed PVC a Frame Remote Site Frame FrameSaver Relay Unit Router Cry DLCI EDLCls 100 0 User Data Relay Merwoik Remote Site FrameSaver 200 Unit DLCI EDLCIs 200 0 User Data 200 2 Management Branch Offic Dedicated Management PVC Non multiplexed NET Pot 8 Branch Office A Frame Relay Router 100 2 Management Data Frame Relay Router Data eB 00 16787 The central site FrameSaver unit ordinarily is configured for management from a Network Management System NMS through either the attached router as shown in the above figure or through the Network Operations Center NOC router for management by the Network Service Provider Multiple management PVCs then connect the central site unit to the remote site units using Paradyne s proprietary PVC multiplexing method embedded DLCls 1 2 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 About FrameSaver SL
241. raphical report should open Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and Domain History In the example below the Domain History icon was selected which is actually a real time report NetScout RMON History Grenada43 File View Format Refresh Applications NetScout RMON History Grenadad3 Utilization 11 17 02 11 28 06 11 34 15 11 40 24 Mon Sep 14 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 10 19 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices NOTE If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been changed via OpenLane the values shown for the distribution will not be accurate Only default size distributions are tracked Statistical Windows Supported Models 9820 and 9820 2M Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are supported for FrameSaver units For example All Convs conversations and TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio button is selected but conversations are not supported Of the icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the following are supported Traffic Statistics Protocol Statistics Traffic Monitor Protocol Monitor Segment Zoom Protocol Zoom Segment Details TopNTalkers Domain History All Talkers 1 Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only not a link If a link is selected all size distribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero When a DLCI is
242. re To switch to the function keys area 1 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area 2 Select either the function s designated underlined character or Tab to the desired function key 3 Press Enter The function is performed To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Selecting a Field User Interface and Basic Operation Once you reach the desired menu or screen select a field to view or change or issue a command Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another The current setting or value appears to the right of the field Entering Information 9820 A2 GB20 20 You can enter information in one of three ways Select the field then Manually type in enter the field value or command Example Entering bjk as a user s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen from the Control menu branch Type in enter the first letter s of a field value or command using the unit s character matching feature Example When configuring a port s physical characteristics with the Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks configuration option field selected possible settings include Disable Local DTPLB DCLB and Both entering d or D displays the first value starting with d Disable In this example entering dt or DT would display DTPLB as the selection Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function
243. referencing the correct table e g Path main config alarm To indicate multiple selection choices when multiple options can be displayed e g Clear Network Port 1 Statistics To indicate a hyperlink to additional information when viewing this manual online Click on the highlighted text 9820 A2 GB20 20 About FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitors This chapter includes the following SLM Overview m FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitor Features SLM Overview The Service Level Management SLM Solution consists of m FrameSaver SLV units OpenLane SLM system m Standalone NetScout Probes and NetScout Manager Plus application optional FrameSaver SLV Service Level Verifier in line monitors add superior diagnostic capability end to end visibility accurate network performance reporting and SLM intelligence to any frame relay network connection regardless of the access device being used FrameSaver SLV in line monitors provide a global multinational SLM solution that can be installed between a DTE such as a router and any type of network access device such as a network termination unit NTU a T1 E1 inverse multiplexer any DSU CSU a Digital Subscriber Line DSL endpoint or an ATM IMA device or ATM Integrated Access Device with frame relay interworking 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 1 1 About FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitors The following illustration shows a network that includes FrameSaver units at the cent
244. resh Falling Threshold Reached public Check every 4 Edit any trap defaults that may be required See Step 4 of Adding SLV Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply your changes The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears 6 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to apply your changes Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds 10 10 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Manually Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be defined and assigned to each DLCI When configuring alarms manually every alarm must be configured for each DLC that is if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCls 160 trap configurations must be created 8 x 20 For this reason it is recommended that the OpenLane defaults be used Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually To load OpenLane default settings for alarms see Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from t
245. rt PVC Tests Data Port Physical Tests IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when no PVCs have been configured on the interface Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and secured Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane 5 x management solution using its Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface as well as from the menu driven user interface Test Timeout Feature A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVC If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and set a duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see Configuring General System Options in Chapter 4 Configuration Options 8 14 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Troubleshooting Starting and Stopping a Test Use this procedure to start monitor or abort specific tests To abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests When the stat
246. ry files for a specific DLCI Example dvuhist f Dallas51 301 3 config 30 60 Dallas301 udh The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI For these examples user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3 on the History List See Step 5 in Monitoring a DLCI s History Data to verify that the user defined history files have been loaded Refer to Installing UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information June 2000 10 15 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Monitoring a DLCI s History Data 10 16 Once the monitoring variables have been defined a problem DLCI can monitored gt Procedure To monitor user history data 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay radio button still selected select the Traffic radio button The appropriate icons appear Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box Highlight the DLCI to be monitored Click on the Custom History icon The NetScout Custom History window opens Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File Yiew Format 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10
247. s Table 4 3 Service Level Verification Options 2 of 2 SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the DLCI Inactive status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Packet Size bytes Available Settings 64 2048 Default Setting 64 Sets the size of packets in bytes that will be used for SLV communications SLV packets are used to track latency and other SLV related variables When the packet size is changed a new round trip and average latency calculation must be performed so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred 64 2048 Sets the packet size for SLV communications SLV Synchronization Role Available Settings Tributary Controller None Default Setting Tributary Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data collection and storage between SLV devices Tributary Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and provides network based synchronization information to other devices in the network Controller Uses its own internal time of day clock and provides synchronization information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock NOTE Only one device in the network
248. s Label Indication What It Means OK Operational Status The unit has power and is operational Alarm Operational Alarm Fail The unit has just been reset or an error or fault has been detected Test Test Mode A test is in progress Backup Backup When flashing the unit is originating or answering a backup session When on a backup link has been established Fan Fail Fan Failure At least one fan has failed Pwr Fail Power Supply Failure One of the power modules has failed 6 8 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Table 6 7 Network and User Data Port Control Leads Label Indication What It Means Both Network and User Data Ports TD Transmit Data Data is being transmitted on the circuit RD Receive Data Data is being received on the circuit DTR Data Terminal Ready Shows the current state of the DTR control lead DSR Data Set Ready Shows the current state of the DSR control lead Additional Network Data Port Control Leads TM Test Mode Shows the current state of the TM interface control lead LMI OK LMI OK Local Management Interface is running successfully on the frame relay link on the network interface See Configuring the Physical Interfaces in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additional information June 2000 6 9 Monitoring Power Module LEDs Model 9820 45M Each power module has a green LED which remains lit while pow
249. s are now possible on the port String Ethernet up Logical Link Sublayer Frame Relay Supported by the media specific Frame Relay Services MIB m iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured or Frame Relay link is disabled If the LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon whether the interface is enabled or disabled Strings ifString down No alarms exist on the link due to LMI ifString LMI down No alarms exist on the link because LMI is down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String ifString up June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults 9820 A2 GB20 20 Table B 7 Input Control Leads That Generate linkDown and linkUp Traps V 35 and EIA 530 A X 21 HSSI Signal Name DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE RTS Control S U S U U U CTS U S U U U U DSR CA U S U U U S DTR TA S U U U S U RLSD Indication U S U S U U S Supported U Unsupported June 2000 Traps enterprise Specific SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supporte
250. s for configuration information Setting Up Service Provider Connectivity at the Central Site When management needs to be set up between a service provider s customer and its network operations center NOC a non multiplexed DLCI must be configured to carry management data between the customer s central site and the NOC console This requires that a frame relay discovered DLCI needs to be modified This is because all auto configured network DLCls are configured as multiplexed DLCls B gt Procedure To set up NOC management 1 Select DLCI Records on the network interface Configuration Network gt DLC Records 2 Select Modify The Modify DLCI Record for DLCI Number prompt appears 3 Select the DLC that will be used by pressing the spacebar until the correct DLCI number appears then select it 4 Change the DLCI Type from Multiplexed to Standard The DLCI in connections Update DLCI usage as follows prompt appears 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 4 11 Configuration Options 5 Selectthe Delete EDLCI Connections and Make a Mgmt Only PVC option PVC connections for the selected DLCI are broken the Port 1 DLCI mapped to this network DLCI and the embedded management DLCI EDLCI are deleted and the selected DLCI will be reconfigured as a management PVC using the Node IP Address See Table 4 8 DLC Record Options for configuration information Setting Up Back to Back Operation Using this special feature you
251. s not configured i e it is zero the COM port s primary IP Address is used when the alternate telephone directory is used Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is set to AT Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 15 Communication Port Options 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the COM port s Alternate IP Address which you can view or edit The first byte i e 177 255 255 255 can be any number from 001 through 223 excluding 127 Remaining bytes i e 223 nnn nnn nnn can be any number from 000 through 255 Leading zeros are required Clear Clears the Alternate IP Address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Alternate Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the Alternate Subnet Mask for the COM port when the alternate phone directory is used Display Conditions This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is set to AT Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 4 17 Communication Port Options 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with
252. s that the DLCI has been configured for the link DLCls without an asterisk have not been configured in the unit These DLCls pass through the unit transparently without being monitored and with no demultiplexing multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being performed Only DLCls on the Net1 FR1 and Port 1 frame relay links appear on this screen nonconfigured DLCls on other links are discarded June 2000 6 21 Monitoring Table 6 13 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Field Status What It Indicates DLCI 16 through 1007 Identifies the Local Management Interface reported DLCI numbers assigned to the selected interface the identifying number assigned to the path between two frame relay FrameSaver units ports DLCI statuses are listed in ascending order i e lowest number first Status LMl reported status of the DLCI Active Whether the DLCI is active capable of carrying data in the frame relay network Inactive Whether it is inactive in the frame relay network Deleted 1 Whether it has been deleted by the frame relay network or New Whether it has been created by the frame relay network CIR bps FrameSaver SLV 9820 Displays the committed information rate 0 128000 reported by the Stratacom switch CIR information only appears in this column FrameSaver SLV when LMI Protocol is set to Standard 9820 2M 0 2048000 FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M 0 8192000 FrameSaver SL
253. s to the menu driven user interface 1 Select the appropriate configuration options screen Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port or for Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt External Modem COM Port or for Model 9820 45M Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt Modem Port 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Limit the effective access level to Level 3 or Level 2 Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the port e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 port access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 3 Save your changes See Chapter 4 Configuration Options for information about the COM port Terminal port on the Model 9820 45M external modem and Modem port configuration options If you inadvertently configure the unit in such a way that communication is no longer possible see Resetting the Unit and Restoring Com
254. se DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option appears only for Model 9820 45M and only if the DLCI field references a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive June 2000 4 39 Configuration Options Configuring General SNMP Management Select General SNMP Management to add change or delete the information needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the NMS supporting the SNMP protocols see Table 4 12 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management Table 4 12 General SNMP Management Options SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable Can be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public in ASCII text field
255. selected the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid bucket i e bucket size lt 64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65 127 bucket and gt 1518 statistics appear in the 1024 1518 bucket Conversations and Long Term and Short Term Histories are not supported in this release As a result no data will appear on windows that include these panes 10 20 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software In addition Network Health has released the first in a series of software modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package see the FrameSaver SLV report example on page 11 9 To get this report you need Network Health R4 01 or higher This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following 9820 A2 GB20 20 Installation and Setup of Network Health and reports Discovering FrameSaver Elements Configuring the Discovered Elements Grouping Elements for Reports Generating Reports for a Group About Service Level Reports About At a Glance Reports About Trend Reports Printed Reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices June 2000 11 1 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices For addit
256. should be configured as the SLV synchronization controller None Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable or when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments June 2000 4 17 Configuration Options Configuring General System Options Select General from the System menu to configure the general system configuration options see Table 4 4 Main Menu gt Configuration gt System General Table 4 4 General System Options Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated automatically Enable All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream If the FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface providing the management access control can be regained after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the maximum duration of the tests Display Conditions This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout
257. sible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the Modem port Only in effect when the Modem port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the Modem port which you can view or edit The first three digits may not be 127 Clear Clears the IP address for the Modem port and fills the address with zeros Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM Terminal port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM Terminal port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM Terminal port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 June 2000 4 61 Configuration Opti
258. sible Settings 1 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM Terminal port 1 Provides one stop bit 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM Terminal port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login June 2000 4 53 Configuration Options Table 4 17 Communication Port Options 3 of 5 Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM Terminal port If a login is required for the port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either
259. stratively frame relay link The specified frame relay link has been disabled by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state This is not an alarm condition so System Operational appears as well LMI Discovery in Progress frame relay link 2 Local Management Interface protocol discovery is in progress to determine which protocol will be used on the specified frame relay link LMI Down frame relay link 2 The Local Management Interface s has been declared down for the specified frame relay link LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network data port Either the control leads on the network data port are deasserted the TM lead is asserted or no clock is detected from the NTU Network Com Link Down The communication link for the COM Terminal port is down and the port is configured for Net Link Power Supply Failure Model 9820 45M Power supply voltage has dropped below an acceptable level SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 2 3 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI the DLCI is not suitable for user data When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted while this condition exists Two Le
260. supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE device Once a protocol has become active the protocol will be set to the protocol discovered Standard Annex A or Annex D on the frame relay link The protocol will not be updated after being initially discovered Frame relay links on the user data port discover the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls Auto_On_LMI_Fail The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs This option is available for frame relay links on the user data port and network data ports Frame relay links on the user data port discover the LMI protocol from LMI status polls on attached DTE devices Frame relay links on the network data port discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Standard Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the Standard LMI Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 617 Annex D June 2000 4 23 Configuration Options Table 4 7 Interface Frame Relay Options 2 of 3 LMI Parameters Possible Settings System Custom Default Setting System Allows you to use the system L
261. t Procedure To set up FrameSaver SLV support 1 Start the OpenLane services then access the application 2 Enter a Customer ID of Admin for access to customer profiles frame relay access facilities components and PVC components Add FrameSaver devices Create customer profiles Set up historical data collection oT e w Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data See the Quick Start Installation Instructions to learn how to perform these steps and for additional information June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following Getting Started Configuring NetScout Manager Plus Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network Verifying Domains and Groups Models 9820 and 9820 2M Correcting Domains and Groups Models 9820 and 9820 2M Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Editing Alarms Adding SLV Alarms Manually Creating History Files Installing the User Defined History Files Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Models 9820 and 9820 2M Statistical Windows Supported Models 9820 and 9820 2M Release 5 5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides FrameSaver SLV specific support 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 10 1 Setting Up NetScout
262. t Largo RedBank dici 10 895 Bytes in bytes sec Latency Maximum Average msec tem lene Burst Out Distribution bytes sec 18x 12 aK 0 orror ey rA E Burst Range 1 E Buret Range 2 E Burst Range 3 E Burst Range 4 E Burst Range 5 Network Frame Drops sec Frames Out frames sec HB lt 0100 bytes E lt 0200 bytes E lt 0800 bytes DLCI Up Time E lt 1000 bytes E lt 4000 bytes Link Up Time s E Auta Range Custom Created 1029 1998 D4 10 07 PM From 10 27 1988 00 10 PM To 10 27 1998 03 39 PM Trend Reports Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCl s poor Health Index rating See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 11 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices 11 10 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Hardware Maintenance 9820 45M Overview The FrameSaver SLV 9820 45M is designed for years of trouble free service There are actions you can take to further reduce the likelihood and
263. t PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC Standard RIP Routing Information Protocol allows the router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to that FrameSaver unit LMI Packet Capture Provides a way to upload data that has been captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis or viewed via the menu driven user interface The 12 most recent LMI messages can be displayed from the menu driven user interface June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 About FrameSaver SLV In Line Monitors ATM VPI VCI and DLCI Correlation For networks with both ATM and frame relay access endpoints allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating Virtual Path or Channel Identifier VPI VCl in the far end ATM access endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped so they can be correlated for OpenLane SLV reports Back to Back Operation Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected via a leased line network or simulation so a point to point configuration can be implemented Configuration Upload Download and Software Download Capability Provides quick transfer of configuration options to and from nodes and software downloads while the unit is running using the standard File Transfer Protocol FTP Two software images can be stored Dual Flash Memory Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and running Two software
264. t be put into a FrameSaver node LMI packet capture data Imitrace syc is not readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is active FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be downloaded in the background using the selected bandwidth and without interfering with normal operation Downloads can be performed quickly using the full line speed or at a slower rate over an extended period of time You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take time Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit s currently active configuration June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 B gt Procedure FTP Operation To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a UNIX host type ftp followed by the FrameSaver unit s IP address If a login and password are required see Creating a Login in Chapter 5 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them If not press Enter The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory Use standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd directory Change th
265. t is configured as an EIA 530 A compatible DTE An EIA 530 compatible DCE can be directly connected to the DB25 connector for this port on the rear of the FrameSaver unit V 35 The port is configured as a V 35 compatible DTE A V 35 compatible DCE can be connected to the DB25 connector for this port using an adapter cable on the rear of the FrameSaver unit X 21 The port is configured as a V 11 X 21 compatible DTE A V 11 X 21 compatible DCE can be connected to the DB25 connector for this port using an adapter cable on the rear of the FrameSaver unit Invert Internal Clock Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the internal clock used for timing data transmitted to the DCE will be phase inverted with respect to the clock received at the interface This option is useful when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver device and the DCE are causing errors Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M Enable The internal clock used to transmit data to the DCE is phase inverted with respect to the clock supplied by the DCE to this port Disable The internal clock is not inverted normal June 2000 4 19 Configuration Options 4 20 Table 4 5 Network Data Port Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Monitor DSR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the DCE Ready DSR cir
266. t s COM port when setup is complete and an external modem connected instead See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem for additional information Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out Models 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M To set up call directories 9820 A2 GB20 20 B gt Procedure 1 Set up directory phone numbers Main Menu gt Control Modem Call Directories 2 Select Directory Number A for Alarm 3 Enter the phone number s Valid characters include For ASCII text Entering the phone number Space Readability characters underscore _ and dash Comma Readability character for a 2 second pause B Blind dialing P Pulse dialing unless B is specified T Tone dialing unless B is specified W Wait for dial tone 4 Save the phone number s June 2000 4 5 Configuration Options Setting Up Auto Configuration The auto configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic configuration and connection of DLCls within the FrameSaver unit as well as to automatically remove DLCls and connections that are no longer supported by the network service provider Auto configuration also maintains associated DLCI option settings when Standard LMI is used on the network data port Main Menu Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Screen Example main auto configuration 9820 2M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 23 32 AUTO CONF IG
267. tandard Display Conditions This option does not appear for the user data port and it cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Management Link Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end For user data port DLCls this is the only selection available Multiplexed Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection 4 26 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 8 DLCI Record Options 2 of 3 CIR bps Possible Settings For FrameSaver SLV 9820 0 128000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M 0 2048000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M 0 8128000 For FrameSaver SLV 9820 45M 0 44210000 Default Setting 64000 Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 x where x the maximum line rate available on the port 0 maximum CIR rate Specifies the DLCI s committed data rate Te Possible Settings 1 65535 Default Setting R
268. tatistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics gt DLCI Table 6 18 DLCI Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates DLCI Up Since 1 Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the time that the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the first time the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network DLCI Up Time Days hours minutes and seconds since the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the amount of time since the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the amount of time since the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network Total Tx Frames Tx Octets m Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR With DE Set Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame rel
269. telephone number is called Display Conditions This option does not appear for Model 9820 45M None Does not dial out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers 1 5 Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory Directory Number A in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories inclusive 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 4 49 Configuration Options Configuring the Ethernet Port Model 9820 45M 4 50 Select Ethernet Port from the Management and Communication menu to display or change the Ethernet port configuration options see Table 4 16 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Ethernet Port The Ethernet port is initially disabled When Interface Status is changed to Enable the message Would you like to set the Node s Default IP Destination to Ethernet appears Answer Yes if you intend to access devices through the Ethernet port that are on a different subnet Table 4 16 Ethernet Port Options 1 of 2 Interface Status Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the interface is available for use Enable The interface is enabled Disable The interface is disabled No alarms or traps associated with the Ethernet port will be generated and any uses of the interface such as Default IP Destination are reset to their
270. tents of devSelfTestResult enterprise Test For physical interfaces and At least one test has been Start 5 frame relay links started on an interface or virtual a iflndex RFC 1573 ae String 0 0 placeholder testString test started on devLastTrapString ifString e g DTE Loopback devHealthAndStatus test started on Sync Data Port mib S01P1 For virtual circuits DLCls enterprise Test Or ViraL creutts DEeI2 All tests have been halted on an Stop 105 devFrExtDicilflndex interface or virtual circuit devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib String testString test stopped on ifString e g Disruptive PVC Loopback test stopped on DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 B 13 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps RMON Specific B 14 Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON See RMON Alarm and Event Defaults for the default values that will generate RMON specific traps Table B 9 RMON Specific Traps and Variable Bindings Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause risingAlarm alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has risen above the set threshold alarmVariable RFC 1757 String Change in variableName alarmSample Type typeString threshold of RFC 1757 alarmRisingThreshold by alarmVal
271. terval Logging 135 90 153 4 Editees Domain Groups SH LH SH LH Stat Host Conv Delete Il Test Learn Property Install fone ecocooooosoo eoooooooooS SOSOoSSDSOSDOS Pere FE aN Pot ye Trap Sample DLCI Name DTE DCE lt GrenadaS8 gt Variable Type Rising Falling DLCI 300 1536K 1536K Edit DLCI 301 1536K 1536K DLCI 302 1536K 1536K Download _ DLCI 303 1536K 1536K DLCI 304 1536K 1536K Reve DLCI 305 1536K 1536K DLCI 306 1536K 1536K DLCI 307 1536K 1536K DLCI 308 1536K 1536K Verify that only FrameSaver SLV supported domains appear listed in the Domain column FrameSaver SLV supported domains include ATALK IPX RMON DECNET NETB SNA IP NET VINES IPV6 OSI Verify that S statistics collection appears for each domain listed in the Group column H hosts appears for the IP domain only Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group column Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns Dashes appear under all Logging columns Stat Host Conv If all these requirements are met no further action is required Close the Configuration Manager window If all these requirements are not met a FrameSaver SLV supported domain needs to be added or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted the Properties File must be edited June 2000 10 5 Setting Up NetScout Manage
272. tions Below is a sample configuration screen showing a 2 Mbps unit Model Number Menu Path Date and Time main config system slv 9820 2M Device Name Node A 05 13 2000 02 02 Device SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS Name SLV Sample Interval secs 60 SLV Delivery Ratio Disable DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Enable Screen SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold 30 Area SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold 1_ SLV Packet Size bytes 64 SLV Synchronization Role Tributary Function Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Keys Area Seve Message Area Screen Format Description Menu Path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device Name Customer assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit 9820 FrameSaver unit s model number the 128 kbps 9820 2 Mbps 9820 2M 8 Mbps 9820 8M or 45 Mbps 9820 45M Screen Area Selection display and input fields for monitoring and maintaining the FrameSaver unit Function Keys Area Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a specified key then pressing Enter Message Area System related information and valid settings for input fields in the lower left corner System and Test Status messages in the lower right corner 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 2 5 Keyboard Keys User Interface and Basic Operation Navigating the Screens You can navigate the screens by m Using keyboard keys Switching be
273. tions received over the interface The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator BECNs Received The number of backward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Frame Relay Errors Total Errors The number of total frame relay errors excluding LMI errors Short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors are included in this total Indicates that there may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link or the units at either the far end or both ends of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid Rx Frames The number of invalid frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface There is a non frame relay device on the other end of the link June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Monitoring Table 6 19 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 of 3 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Errors cont d Short Rx Frames The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were less than 5 octets five 8 bit bytes in length There may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Long Rx Frames The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were more
274. transmission Deferred The number of frames whose transmission was delayed Transmissions because the medium was busy 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 6 37 Monitoring Trap Event Log Model 9820 45M The Trap Event Log display is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status gt Trap Event Log Trap Event Log Screen Example main status connections 9820 45M Device Name Node A 05 13 2000 5 09 TRAP EVENT LOG Total Trap Events Time Elapsed Since Event Event Od 09 01 32 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 1d 22 21 19 Unit Reset 1d 22 25 01 Primary Clock Failed ESC for previous menu MainMenu Refresh PgUp PgDn Table 6 21 Trap Event Log Field What It Indicates Total Trap Events The number of entries in the log Time Elapsed Since The number of days hours minutes and seconds since the Event specified event occurred Event The trap text string up to 255 characters 6 38 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 FTP Operation This chapter includes the following FTP File Transfer Upgrading System Software Determining Whether a Download is Completed Changing Software Transferring Collected Data 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 7 1 FTP Operation FTP File Transfer 7 2 The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP A complete binary image of the
275. ttings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLC contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number Alternate Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the alternate destination link if the Primary Destination Link fails The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLC or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if the network data port has no DLCls defined this interface would not appear as a valid setting Display Conditions This option appears only for Model 9820 45M Net1 FR1 Specifies the network data port as the destination link 4 30 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Table 4 9 PVC Connection Options 3 of 3 AlternateDestination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection
276. tween the two screen work areas using function keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area Press To Ctrl a Move cursor between the screen area and the screen function keys area Esc Return to the previous screen Tab on any screen row Right Arrow on same screen row or Move cursor to the next field Left Arrow on same screen row or Move cursor to the previous field Ctrl k Backspace Move cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Select the next valid value for the field Delete Del Delete character that the cursor is on Up Arrow or Ctrl u Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Down Arrow or Ctrl d Move cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Right Arrow or Ctrl f Move cursor one character to the right if in edit mode Left Arrow or Ctrl b Move cursor one character to the left if in edit mode Ctrl l Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Enter Return Accept entry or when pressed before entering data or after entering invalid data display valid options on the last row of the screen June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 User Interface and Basic Operation Function Keys 9820 A2 GB20 20 All function keys located in the lower part of the screen operate the same way thr
277. twork Frames Lost MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 22 1 D Rx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 37 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 39 1 D Network Frames Offered In CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFrinCir 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 B 25 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 History OID Cross Reference 3 of 4 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 41 1 D Network Frames Dropped In CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciDropOffFrinCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 43 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciRmtOffFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 45 1 D Network Frames Lost Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtDropFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 55 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR Within EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciDropFrCirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6
278. ue RFC 1757 alarmValue a alarmRisingThreshold alarmRisingThreshold or e g Octets received on Sync alarm Falling Threshold Data Port SO1P1 frame relay RFC 1757 rose to threshold of 1 devLastTrapString typeString is rose to devHealthAndStatus if alarmValue equals mib alarmRising Threshold otherwise it is exceeded fallingAlarm alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has alarmVariable RFC 1757 alarmSampleType RFC 1757 alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmFalling Threshold fallen below the set threshold String Change in variableName typeString threshold of alarmRisingThreshold by alarmFalling Threshold alarmValue e g Octets received on Sync RFC 1757 Data Port S01P1 frame relay devLastTrapString rose to threshold of 1 devHealthAndStatus typeString is fell to mib if alarmValue equals alarmFalling Threshold otherwise it is fell below June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults RMON Alarm and Event Defaults The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent Event Defaults Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit there is no need to define multiple events for each alarm type
279. umber of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2
280. us of a testis The only command available is Inactive Start Active Stop Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure B gt Procedure To start and stop a test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select an interface to be tested Network or Data Port PVC Tests or Data Port Physical Tests and press Enter The selected test screen appears Start appears in the Command column Inactive appears in the Status column 3 Select the DLC number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available test Start is highlighted 4 Highlight the Start command for the test you want to start and press Enter Stop now appears and is highlighted and the status of the test changes to Active 5 Press Enter to stop the test Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive 6 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 8 15 Troubleshooting Aborting All Tests 8 16 Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that are active see Starting and Stopping a Test p gt Procedure To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and
281. vel 1 Users Accessing Device Two Level 1 users are already using the menu driven user interface only two sessions can be active at one time 1 nnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 3 Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI June 2000 6 19 Monitoring 6 20 Test Status Messages These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status screen You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for more information on tests including how to start and stop them Table 6 12 Test Status Messages Message What It Indicates DTE External LB Active Port 1 An external DTE Loopback is running on the user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port 1 The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on the user data port Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing the LEDs on the faceplate to flash on and off Monitor Pttn Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link No Test Active No tests are currently running PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 A PVC Loopback is active on th
282. vice Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network data port Network 1 Port 1 The frame relay link associated with the user data port 9820 A2 GB20 20 June 2000 8 9 Troubleshooting 8 10 Table 8 1 Alarm Conditions 4 of 4 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected Either the control leads on the network data port are deasserted the TM lead is asserted or no clock is detected from the NTU Network cable problem No signal is being transmitted at the far end FrameSaver unit NTU or network facility problem Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact your network provider Power Supply Failure 9820 45M The power supply output voltage has dropped below the specified tolerance level Notify your service representative See Replacing a Power Module in Chapter 12 Hardware Maintenance 9820 45M Self Test Failure The unit did not pass its basic verification tests when it was powered on or reset Reset the unit Contact your service representative SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 2 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote system have been missed on the spe
283. ware Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional download information June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults System Group mib 2 This section provides the system description and system object identifier for the System Group for a FrameSaver SLV 9820 unit which is an SNMPv1 MIB FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 The following is the system description sysDescr system 1 for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver SLV 9820 unit PARADYNE DP FrameSaver SLV Model 9820 9820 2M 9820 8M or 9820 45M S W Release MM mm bb MM Major mm minor bb build format NAM CCA number hardware version in hhhh hhh format Serial number sssssss FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 9820 A2 GB20 20 The following is the system object identifier sysObjectID system 2 or OID for the NMS subsystem in the following FrameSaver SLV 9820 units FrameSaver SLV 9820 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 7 1 FrameSaver SLV 9820 2M 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 7 2 FrameSaver SLV 9820 8M 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 7 3 FrameSaver SLV 9820 45M 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 7 4 June 2000 B 3 Interfaces Group mib 2 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group as defined in RFC 1573 and RFC 1213 which is an SNMPv1 MIB is provided in this section Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable The following table provides the ifName for each int
284. work Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCls and the DLCls have been grouped you can start generating reports When selecting a report Section select WAN from the drop down list See Running Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report generation NOTE Network Health provides information with each chart or table generally referred to as a report Click on the hyperlink Explanation of for an explanation of the report and its features You can also refer to the Network Health Reports Guide About Service Level Reports For long term analysis and reporting you will want to license the Service Level Reports application This application analyzes data collected over months or by quarters and provides service level information about an enterprise a region department or business process Executive IT Manager and Customer Service Level reports are provided Using these reports you can measure service performance against goals and agreements Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled About At a Glance Reports At a Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network performance indicators onto a single page Up to ten DLCls can be included in an
285. y pull the front panel toward you Remove the fan power cable and LED ribbon cable Lay the front panel face down on a flat surface Vacuum the fan blades and cages with the brush attachment of a vacuum cleaner A WARNING 12 2 Each fan starts spinning as soon as the fan power cable is reconnected Keep your hair and clothes away from the fan blades Reconnect the LED ribbon cable then reconnect the fan power cable Verify that all four fans are running Replace the front panel and tighten the captive screws CAUTION Do not leave the front panel assembly off the unit for extended periods or the unit will overheat June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Hardware Maintenance 9820 45M Replacing the Front Panel Assembly The System FAN LED on the front panel turns on when one or more of the front panel fans has failed Replace the front panel assembly as soon as possible after this occurs Refer all service to qualified personnel The procedure may be performed while the unit is running B gt Procedure To replace the front panel 1 Loosen the captive screws holding on the front panel A WARNING The fans continue to run until the fan power cable is removed Keep your hair and clothes away from the fan blades 2 Carefully pull the front panel toward you Verify that at least one of the fans has failed 3 Remove the fan power cable and LED ribbon cable and set the old front panel assembly aside A WARNING Each
286. y valid interface number for a FrameSaver 9820 model is 101016002 4 Edit the new file as needed Refer to Creating UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Default for OID information for an interface 10 14 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Installing the User Defined History Files 9820 A2 GB20 20 Once the user defined history files have been created the files need to be installed History files are installed from the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus Should the FrameSaver unit be reset these files will need to be reinstalled The command used to install a new user history table is located in NSHOME bin CAUTION Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2 UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports Editing either of these files will destroy SLV reporting capability B gt Procedure 1 Type dvuhist f agentname user_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download_file udh to load user defined history files for the frame relay link Example dvuhist f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallas51lk udh The interval must be entered in seconds Type dvuhist f agentname DLCI_number user_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download_file udh to load user defined histo
287. ype MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Rx DLCI Link D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115 1 min capability capability Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Tx DLCI Link D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115 1 min capability capability Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained B 22 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Object ID Cross References Numeric Order The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap is sent and or a log entry is made This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing the NetScout Custom History screen shown below which provides the OID instead of the alarm condition NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 BLC I 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File View Format 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17
288. ype is set to V 35 or EIA530 Detector Shows the current state of the RLSD control lead If Port Type is set to X 21 Shows the current state of the Indication interface control lead DSR Data Set Ready Shows the current state of the DSR control lead This lead is not used when Port Type is set to X 21 CTS Clear to Send Shows the current state of the CTS control lead This lead is not used when Port Type is set to X 21 TM Test Mode A test is currently running in the NTU This lead is not used when Port Type is set to X 21 Additional User Data Port Conirol Leads DTR Data Terminal Ready Shows the current state of the DTR control lead This lead is not used when Port Type is set to X 21 RTS Request to Send If Port Type is set to V 35 or EIA530 Shows the current state of the RTS control lead If Port Type is set to X 21 Shows the current state of the Control interface control lead See Configuring the Physical Interfaces in Chapter 4 Configuration Options for additional information June 2000 6 7 Monitoring Display LEDs and Control Leads Screen Model 9820 45M Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen Model 9820 45M main status leds 9820 45M Device Name Node A 5 13 2000 05 02 Refresh DISPLAY LEDS amp CONTROL LEADS DP FR NAM GENERAL NETWORK1 Port 1 OK TD TD Alarm RD RD Test Backup Fan Fail Pwr Fail for previous menu MainMenu Exit Table 6 6 General LED
289. zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 4 58 June 2000 9820 A2 GB20 20 Configuration Options Configuring the Modem Port Model 9820 45M 9820 A2 GB20 20 Select Modem Port from the Management and Communication menu to display or change the Modem port configuration options see Table 4 19 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port Table 4 19 Modem Port Options 1 of 3 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the Modem port NOTE Ifthe Default IP Destination is set to Modem see Table 4 10 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The Modem port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The Modem port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device port Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether dial in access to the Modem port is allowed Enable Dial in access is permitted Port Use must be set to Terminal Disable Dial in access is not permitted Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disa

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Blood Glucose Monitoring Date Developed: 4/201  Beko TL546AP  F-Secure Webcam Internet Security 2005 User's Manual  Manuel d`utilisation  Manuel du Propriétaire  Menu    I L o t - e  academia de bombeiros militar salvamento terrestre cfsd 2014  Serving AuStrAliAn SchoolS Since 1981  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file